FCC ID: AFJ318300 HF/VHF/UHF Transceiver

 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL HF/VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER i9100 FOREWORD SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES Thank you for making the IC-9100 your radio of choice. We hope you agree with Icoms philosophy of technology first. Many hours of research and devel-

opment went into the design of your IC-9100. FEATURES

The IC-9100 fully covers HF to 1200 MHz*1 multi-

band in one transceiver

Independent dual receivers in one radio; receives two different bands simultaneously

Optional D-STAR (Digital Smart Technology for Am-

ateur Radio) allows you to operate in the DV mode*2 for digital voice and low speed data communication. Linking of D-STAR repeaters over the Internet al-

lows you to communicate virtually anywhere.

Satellite mode operation

*1 The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz fre-

quency band operation.

*2 The optional UT-121 is required for the DV mode opera-

tion. IMPORTANT READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before attempting to operate the transceiver. SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for the IC-9100. EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS WORD DEFINITION RDANGER! Personal death, serious injury or an ex-

plosion may occur. RWARNING! Personal injury, fire hazard or electric CAUTION NOTE shock may occur. Equipment damage may occur. If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk of personal injury, re or electric shock. Spurious signals may be received near some fre-

quencies. These are created in the internal circuit and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction. i The transceiver comes with the following accessories. Qty. q Hand microphone ............................................ 1 w DC power cable* ............................................. 1 e Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ...................................... 1 r Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) .................................... 2 t ACC cable......................................................... 1 y 6.3 (d) mm plug................................................. 1 u Double-sided tape............................................. 1 q w e t y r u For European versions w

(see p. 27 for installation details)

*Differs depending on the version. FCC INFORMATION

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equip-

ment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following measures:

and receiver.

circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

technician for help. PRECAUTIONS R DANGER HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission. This may result in an electrical shock or burn. R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with a headset or other audio accessories at high volume levels. Hearing experts advise against continu-

ous high volume operation. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use. R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the transceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock or damage to the transceiver. R WARNING! NEVER apply AC power to the

[DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a fire or damage the transceiver. R WARNING! NEVER cut the DC power cable between the DC plug and fuse holder. If an incorrect connection is made after cutting, the transceiver may be damaged. R WARNING! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC to the [DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel, or use reverse polarity. This could cause a fire or damage the transceiver. R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock. R WARNING! Immediately turn OFF the trans-

ceiver power and remove the power cable if it emits an abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or distributor for advice. R WARNING! NEVER put the transceiver in any unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or vibrated place). This may cause injury and/or damage to the transceiver. CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver perfor-

mance and/or damage to the transceiver. In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits, such as output power, idling current, etc., might damage the expensive final devices. The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob-

lems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment. CAUTION: NEVER block any cooling vents on the top, rear, sides or bottom of the transceiver. CAUTION: NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or any liquids. CAUTION: NEVER install the transceiver in a place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be reduced, and the transceiver may be damaged. DO NOT use harsh solvents such as benzine or alcohol when cleaning, as they will damage the trans-

ceiver surfaces. DO NOT push the PTT switch when you dont actu-

ally desire to transmit. DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with temperatures below 0C (+32F) or above +50C

(+122F). DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty environments or in direct sunlight. DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat the transceiver. Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-

tent use by children.

If you use a linear amplifier, set the transceivers RF output power to less than the linear amplifiers maximum input level, otherwise, the linear amplifier will be damaged.

The transceiver will become hot when operating the transceiver continuously for long periods of time. USE only the specified microphone. Other manufac-

turers microphones have different pin assignments, and connection to the IC-9100 may damage the transceiver or microphone. During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans-

ceiver and microphone as far away as possible from the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-

ous indications. Turn OFF the transceivers power and/or disconnect the DC power cable when you will not use the trans-

ceiver for long period of time. For U.S.A. only CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your authority to operate this device under FCC regula-

tions. Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trade-

marks of their respective holders. ii

10 GHz Zone Repeater A Area 440 MHz Station A Repeater B 440 MHz Station B Internet Internet 10 GHz Zone Repeater D 440 MHz Station D Repeater C 440 MHz Station C D-STAR INTRODUCTION D About the D-STAR system In the original D-STAR (Digital Smart Technologies for Amateur Radio) plan, JARL envisioned a system of repeaters grouped together into Zones. A zone would be a group of up to 4 repeaters, linked by 10 GHz backbone microwave Link repeaters. Each individual repeater would be call an Area repeater, and would be the Access repeater to begin communications. Calls could be made to other Area repeaters within the Zone, using the backbone Link repeater system. One of the repeaters in the Zone would have an In-

ternet connection, and so in addition to being an Area repeater, it also became the Zone Gateway repeater. The Internet gateway provided a way to communicate to other Zones, giving access to the Area repeaters within them, and eventually to the entire world. Call signs are the heart of D-STAR operation. Four call signs are used:

then basically leave it set, with only a few ex-

ceptions.

-

tual ham or repeater you wish to contact. CQC-

QCQ can also be used to make a general call.

one you enter to begin your D-STAR repeater communication.

the repeater and Internet connection you go through when you want contact a ham, or an-

other repeater, anywhere else in the world. Call sign routing, one of the main features of D-STAR, allows hams to contact other hams, or other repeat-

ers using just the hams or repeaters call sign. The D-STAR system will automatically route your signal to the desired ham or repeater. Call sign capture allows hams using an Icom radio to capture a call sign and automatically program their radio for a reply. Like other communication modes, you can operate simplex D-STAR with other hams, for direct commu-

nication. See pages 85 to 120 for the D-STAR operation de-

tails. NOTE: The optional UT-121 is required for the D-

STAR operation with the IC-9100. iii D Area 1 Area 2 Area 3

(Gateway) Area 4 Repeater 1 Repeater 2 Repeater 3 Repeater 4 Zone A Internet Internet Area 5 Repeater 5 Zone B Area 6

(Gateway) Repeater 6 Area 7 Area 8 Repeater 7 Repeater 8 Area:

The Area is the communication range that is covered by a single repeater. The repeater is called an area, or access repeater in the D-STAR system. Link repeater:

The microwave (10 GHz) link repeater provides linking with another repeater site (Area) for zone construction. Zone:

The Zone is composed of several areas, that are linked by a 10 GHz microwave link. Areas 1 to 4 and 5 to 8 make up a zone in the example above. Gateway repeater:

Gateway repeaters provide communications between different zones via the internet. Repeater 3 and 6 are gateway repeaters at example above. the iv TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD .............................................................. IMPORTANT............................................................... EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS............................................ SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES....................................... FCC INFORMATION .................................................. PRECAUTIONS......................................................... D-STAR INTRODUCTION........................................ D About the D-STAR system ................................iii D D-STAR system description ..............................iv

............................................ v 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION................................... 121

Front panel ........................................................ 1

Rear panel....................................................... 10 D ACC socket information .............................. 13 D DATA2 socket information ........................... 14

LCD display..................................................... 15

Function display .............................................. 19 D M1 (Menu 1) display.................................... 19 D M2 (Menu 2) display.................................... 19 D M3 (Menu 3) display.................................... 19 D D1 display ................................................... 19 D D2 display ................................................... 19 D Function keys on M1 (Menu 1) display ....... 20 D Function keys on M2 (Menu 2) display ....... 20 D Function keys on M3 (Menu 3) display ....... 21 D Function keys on D1 display ....................... 21 D Function keys on D2 display ....................... 21 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS........ 2230

Selecting a location ......................................... 22

Grounding ....................................................... 22

Electronic keyer and microphone connections 22

Antenna connection ........................................ 23

Required connections ..................................... 24 D Rear panel .................................................. 24

Advanced connections .................................... 25 D Front panel.................................................. 25 D Rear panel .................................................. 25

External keypad connections .......................... 26

Optional and the external units connections ... 26

Power supply connections............................... 27

Connecting a DC power supply....................... 27 D Connecting the PS-126

................................. 27 D Connecting a non-Icom

................................. 27

Linear amplier connections ........................... 28 D Connecting the IC-PW1/PW1EURO........... 28 D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplier ...... 29

External antenna tuner connection ................. 29 D Connecting the AH-4 .................................. 29 v

Microphone connector information.................. 30

Microphones.................................................... 30 D HM-36 ......................................................... 30 D SM-50 (Option) ........................................... 30 3 ..................................... 3146

Before rst applying power.............................. 31

Turning ON (Partial resetting).......................... 31

MAIN and SUB Bands..................................... 32 D MAIN/SUB Band selection.......................... 32 D SUB Band display....................................... 32 D SUB Band setting mode operation ............. 33 D The SUB Dial function................................. 33

VFO description............................................... 34 D Selecting the VFO A/B ............................... 34 D VFO equalization........................................ 34

Selecting VFO/memory mode ......................... 34

Selecting a frequency band............................. 35 D Using the band stacking registers............... 35

Frequency setting............................................ 37 D Tuning with [MAIN DIAL] ............................. 37 D Direct frequency entry with the keypad....... 37 D Quick tuning function .................................. 38 D Selecting kHz step.................................... 38 D Selecting 1 Hz step..................................... 39 D Auto tuning step function ............................ 39 D 14 tuning step function ............................... 39 D About the 5 MHz frequency band operation

(only USA version)...................................... 40 D Band edge warning beep............................ 41 D Programming the user band edge .............. 42

Operating mode selection ............................... 43

Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity............... 44

Volume setting................................................. 45

Voice synthesizer operation............................. 45

Meter Display selection ................................... 45

Basic transmit operation.................................. 46 D Transmitting................................................. 46 D Microphone gain adjustment....................... 46 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT .......................... 4768

Operating SSB ................................................ 47

Operating CW ................................................. 48 D About the CW reverse mode....................... 49 D About CW pitch control ............................... 49 D About keying speed..................................... 49 D CW sidetone function.................................. 49

Electronic keyer functions ............................... 50 D Memory keyer menu construction............... 50 D Memory keyer send menu........................... 51 D Editing a memory keyer .............................. 52 D Contest number Set mode .......................... 53 D Keyer Set mode .......................................... 54

.................................... 56

................................................ 57 D ....................... 57 D ......................... 58 D Twin Peak Filter ........................................... 58 D............................................. 59 D .......................................... 60

Operating AM/FM............................................ 61

Tone squelch operation ................................... 62

DTCS operation .............................................. 63

Tone scan/DTCS code scan operation............ 64

 Repeater operation.......................................... 65 D Repeater access tone frequency setting..... 65 D One-touch repeater function ....................... 66 D Transmit frequency monitor check............... 66 D Setting the Auto Repeater ranges

(U.S.A. and Korea versions only) ................ 67 D Turning ON the Auto Repeater function

(U.S.A. and Korea versions only) ................ 68 D Storing a non standard repeater ................ 68 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE........................ 6977

AFC operation ................................................. 69

RIT function..................................................... 69 D RIT monitor function.................................... 69

Simple band scope.......................................... 70

Preamplier ..................................................... 71

Attenuator........................................................ 71

AGC function................................................... 72 D AGC speed selection .................................. 72 D Setting the AGC time constant.................... 72

IF lter selection .............................................. 73 D IF lter selection.......................................... 73 D Filter passband width setting ...................... 73 D 1st IF lter selection .................................... 74 D IF (DSP) lter shape ................................... 74

Twin PBT operation ......................................... 75

Noise Blanker.................................................. 76 D NB Set mode............................................... 76

Meter peak hold function................................. 76

Noise Reduction.............................................. 77

Dial Lock function............................................ 77

Notch function ................................................. 77 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT ..................... 7884

VOX function.................................................... 78 D Using the VOX function ............................... 78 D Adjusting the VOX function.......................... 78

Break-in function ............................................. 79 D Semi Break-in operation ............................. 79 D Full Break-in operation................................ 79

Speech compressor ........................................ 80

Transmit lter width selection ............................80

TX function ................................................... 81 D TX Monitor function .................................. 81

Monitor function............................................... 81

Split frequency operation ................................ 82

Quick Split function ......................................... 83 D Split frequency offset setting....................... 83 D Split Lock function....................................... 83

Measuring SWR .............................................. 84 D Spot measurement...................................... 84 D Plot measurement....................................... 84 7 DV MODE PROGRAMMING ........................ 8592

Call sign programming .................................... 85 D ...... 85 D UR (Destination call sign) programming ... 86 D R1 (Access/Area repeater call sign) and R2 (Link/Gateway repeater call sign) programming............................................... 87

Repeater list .................................................... 88 D Repeater list contents ................................. 88

Repeater list programming..................................89

Editing a repeater list ...................................... 91

Clearing a repeater list........................................92 8 DV MODE OPERATION ............................. 93120

Digital mode operation .................................... 93

Call sign setting............................................... 93

Receiving a D-STAR repeater ......................... 94

Received call signs.......................................... 95 D Desired call record display.......................... 95 D One-touch reply using the call record ......... 96

Copying the call sign ....................................... 97 D Copying the call sign memory contents ...... 97 D Copying the call record contents into call sign memory .................................. 98

DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode operation......... 99 D Communication Form.................................. 99 D Access repeater scan ............................... 100

Calling CQ..................................................... 101 D Storing the set data................................... 102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS

Calling a specic station................................ 103 D Conrming the setting............................... 105 D Settings for UR and R2, depending on the communication form.................................. 105

Simplex operation using the VFO.................. 106 D Making a simplex CQ call or a call to an individual station .................................. 106

Repeater operation using the VFO................ 107 D Making a CQ call or a call to an individual station through your local area (access) repeater (Local Area call).......................... 107 D Making a CQ call or a call to an individual station through a link repeater in the same zone (Zone call) ........................................ 108 D Making a CQ call or a call to an individual station through gateway repeaters

(Gateway call) ........................................... 109 D Settings for UR and R2, depending on the communication form.................................. 110

Message operation........................................ 111 D TX message programming........................ 111 D Message Transmission.............................. 112 D RX message display ................................. 112

DV automatic detection ................................. 113

Automatic reply function................................ 113

Digital squelch functions ............................... 114

EMR communication ..................................... 115 D Adjusting the EMR AF level ...................... 115

Break-in communication................................ 116

Low-speed data communication.................... 117 D Connection................................................ 117 D Low-speed data communication application setting ....................................................... 117 D Low-speed data communication operation 117

Packet loss indication.................................... 117

DV Set mode description............................... 118 D DV Set mode settings ............................... 118 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION........................ 121137

GPS operation............................................... 121 D GPS screen construction .......................... 121 D GPS data communication ......................... 122 D Sentence formatter setting........................ 122 D Position display ......................................... 123 D Saving your own or received position data 124 D Display the Grid Locator information......... 124 D GPS automatic transmission..................... 124 D GPS message programming..................... 125 D Received GPS message display............... 126

GPS memory operation................................. 127 D Add a GPS memory.................................. 127 D Edit a GPS memory .................................. 129 D GPS alarm setting..................................... 130 D GPS memory clearing............................... 131

GPS Set mode .............................................. 132

GPS-A operation ........................................... 137 D GPS-A function ......................................... 137 D GPS-A code details................................... 137 10 MEMORY OPERATION............................ 138144

General description ....................................... 138 D Memory channel contents......................... 138

Memory channel selection ............................ 139 D Selection in the VFO mode ....................... 139 D Selection in the Memory mode ................. 139

Call channel selection ................................... 139

Memory channel programming ..................... 140 D Programming in the VFO mode ................ 140 D Programming in the Memory mode........... 140

Call channel programming ............................ 141

Memory clearing ........................................... 141

Memory contents copying ............................. 142 D Copying in the VFO mode......................... 142 D Copying in the Memory mode ................... 142

Memory name programming ......................... 143

Memo pad function........................................ 144 D Writing the displayed data into memo pads. 144 D Calling up the memo pads ........................ 144 11 SCANS ..................................................... 145152

Scan types .................................................... 145

Preparation.................................................... 146

Voice Squelch Control function ..................... 146

Scan set mode .............................................. 147

Scan edges programming ............................. 148

Programmed scan/Fine programmed scan

(VFO mode) .................................................. 149 D About the Fine programmed scan............. 149

Memory scan (Memory mode) ...................... 150 D Memory scan ............................................ 150 D Mode Select scan ..................................... 150 D Setting/Cancelling Select Memory channels. 151 D Select Memory scan ................................. 151

F scan and Fine F scan ........................... 152 D About the Fine F scan ............................ 152 vii 17 MAINTENANCE ....................................... 177182

Troubleshooting ............................................. 177 D Transceiver power ..................................... 177 D Transmit and receive................................. 177 D Scanning................................................... 178 D Display ...................................................... 178

Frequency calibration (approximate)............. 179

Main dial tuning tension adjustment.............. 179

Fuse replacement ......................................... 180 D DC power cable fuse replacement............ 180 D Circuitry fuse replacement........................ 180

Resetting the CPU ........................................ 181 D Partial reset............................................... 181 D All reset..................................................... 181

Data cloning .................................................. 182 DCloning between transceivers.................... 182 DCloning using a personal computer ........... 182 18 CONTROL COMMAND ............................ 183196

Remote jack (CI-V) information..................... 183 D CI-V connection example.......................... 183 D Data format ............................................... 183 D Command table ........................................ 184 D Data content description........................... 190 19 SPECIFICATIONS .................................... 197198

General .............................................................. 197

Transmitter..................................................... 197

Receiver ........................................................ 198

Antenna tuner................................................ 198 20 OPTIONS.................................................. 199200 21 CE............................................................. 201202 12 SATELLITE OPERATION......................... 153157

Satellite communications outline................... 153

Satellite notes................................................ 153

Selecting the satellite mode .......................... 153 D Transferring the VFO frequencies to the satellite VFO.............................................. 153

Setting the satellite VFO................................ 154

Tracking selection.......................................... 154 D Normal tracking......................................... 154 D Reverse tracking ....................................... 154

Satellite memory ........................................... 155 D Satellite memory selection........................ 155 D Satellite memory programming................. 155

Preparation.................................................... 156

Satellite operation ......................................... 157 13 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION ............. 158160

Antenna connection and selection ................ 158

Antenna tuner operation................................ 159 D Tuner operation ......................................... 159 D Manual tuning ........................................... 159

Optional external tuner operation.................. 160 14 SET MODE ............................................... 161172

Set mode description .................................... 161 D The Set mode settings .............................. 161

Tone control Set mode description ................ 169 D The Tone control Set mode settings.......... 169 15 DATA COMMUNICATION......................... 171173

Connections .................................................. 171 D When connecting to [DATA2]..................... 171 D When connecting to [ACC]........................ 171 D When connecting to [MIC]......................... 171

Packet (AFSK) operation............................... 172 D Frequency display during AFSK operation 172

Data transmission speed............................... 173

Adjusting the TNC output level ...................... 173 D Using a level meter or synchroscope ........ 173 D Not using a measuring device................... 173 16 OPTION INSTALLATION ......................... 174176

Opening the transceivers case ..................... 174

UX-9100 1200 MHz BAND UNIT installation ...... 175

FL-430/FL-431 1ST IF FILTER installation........ 176

UT-121 DIGITAL UNIT installation ..................... 176 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 viii 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

q

!2 !1 w e r t y u i o

!0 q POWER SWITCH [POWER] (p. 31)

Push to turn ON the transceiver power.

Hold down for 1 second to turn OFF the power.

w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT] (p. 46) Push to select transmit or receive.

-

dicator (i or !5) lights red.

-

tor lights green. e ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. 159)

Push to turn the internal antenna tuner ON or OFF (bypass).

-

appears when the tuner is turned ON. rized in each frequency band.

Hold down for 1 second to manually start the an-

tenna tuner.

-

onds, the tuning circuit is automatically bypassed. r

(p. 158)

Push to select either the ANT1 or ANT2 connec-

tor.

(p. 45)

Hold down for 1 second to toggle the transmit meter function between ALC, COMP and SWR. 1

t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]

Plug in standard stereo headphones (impedance: 8 to 16 ).

load.

and any external speaker, are disabled.

-

rated when using stereo headphones, depending on the Phone Separate option in the Set mode. (p. 160) y ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY]

Plug in a bug or paddle type key to use the internal electronic keyer for CW operation. (p. 22)

key in the Keyer Type item of the Keyer Set mode.

dash) in the Paddle Polarity item of the Keyer Set mode.

(p. 55)

-

venience. (p. 51) ot o a u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]

Plug in the supplied or an optional microphone.

i

Lights green when the squelch opens, or a signal

transmit.

Blinks green when an off-frequency signal is re-

ceived, depending on the FM/DV Center Error option in the Set mode. (p. 162) o SQUELCH CONTROL [RF/SQL]

Rotate to adjust the RF gain and squelch threshold level for the MAIN Band. The squelch removes noise output to the speaker when no signal is received. (closed condition)

also works in other modes.

for the most effective use of the [RF/SQL] control.

[RF/SQL] operates as only an RF gain control in SSB,

Squelch is xed open), or a squelch control in AM, FM and DV (RF gain is xed at maxi-

mum sensitivity), when Auto is selected as the RF/

SQL Control item option in the Set mode. (p. 162)

Noise squelch (FM/DV modes) Recommended level Squelch is open. RF gain adjustable range Maximum RF gain S-meter squelch

Adjustable range Minimum RF gain Maximum RF gain While rotating the RF gain control, a faint noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.

(RF gain is xed at maximum.) Noise squelch (FM/DV modes) Noise squelch threshold

(FM mode) Squelch is open. S-meter squelch threshold S-meter squelch Shallow Deep PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

!0

Rotate to adjust audio output level to the speaker or headphones on the MAIN Band. n rea e De rea e

!1 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (p. 77)

In the SSB and AM modes, push to toggle the

notch function between auto, manual and OFF. 1

turned OFF in the [NOTCH] SW item of the Set mode. (p. 36)

In the FM mode, push to turn the Auto Notch function ON or OFF.

In the mode, push to turn the Man-

ual Notch function ON or OFF.

ON.

Hold down for 1 second to switch the manual lter characteristics from wide, mid and narrow, when the Manual Notch function is selected.

What is the notch lter?

The notch lter is a narrow lter that eliminates un-

wanted CW or AM carrier tones, while preserving the desired voice signal. The DSP circuit automati-

cally adjusts the notch frequency to effectively elim-

inate unwanted tones.

!2 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]

Rotate to adjust the notch frequency to reject an interfering signal while the manual function is ON.

CW AM

: CW pitch freq. 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq. +2540 Hz

: 5060 Hz to +5100 Hz Higher frequency Lower frequency The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 2 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Front panel (continued)

!5

!4

!3

!6

!7

!8

!9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8

!3 MENU SWITCH [MENU] (p. 19)

Push to change the set of functions assigned to switches ([F-1] to [F-5]).

(Menu 1), M2 (Menu 2), M3 (Menu 3), D1 and D2.

Hold down for 1 second to enter the Set mode. Push to return to the previous screen display.

!4 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]

Rotate to adjust the DSP noise reduction level when the noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum readability.

[NR] (!5).

!8 Rotate to adjust audio output level to the speaker or headphones on the SUB Band.

!9 MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC GAIN] (p. 46) Rotate to adjust the microphone gain.

be independently adjusted in the tone control Set mode.

(p. 169)

How to set the microphone gain. Set the meter function to ALC. (p. 45) While speak-

ing at normal voice level, adjust the [MIC GAIN]

control so that in the SSB or AM modes, the ALC meter swings within the ALC range. Increases Recommended level for Icom microphones Decreases

!5 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. 77)

Push to turn DSP noise reduction ON or OFF.

!6 Lights green when the squelch opens, or a signal is

-

mit in the satellite mode.

Blinks green when an off-frequency signal is re-

ceived, depending on the FM/DV Center Error option in the Set mode. (p. 162)

!7 SQUELCH CONTROL [RF/SQL]

Rotate to adjust the RF gain and squelch threshold level on the SUB Band. The squelch stops noise output to the speaker when no signal is received. (closed condition) See o on page 2 for details. 3 Decreases Increases

@0 RF POWER CONTROL [RF POWER] (p. 46) Rotate to continuously vary the RF output power. Decreases Increases

HF/50 MHz 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz

2 to 100 W (AM: 2 to 30 W) 2 to 100 W 2 to 75 W 1 to 10 W

@1 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH]

Rotate to shift the received CW audio pitch and the CW sidetone pitch without changing the operating frequency.

-

proximatly 5 Hz steps. Lower pitch Higher pitch 8

@2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL

[KEY SPEED] (p. 49)

Rotate to adjust the keying speed of the internal electronic CW keyer to between 6 wpm (minimum) and 48 wpm (maximum).

Slow Fast

@3 PREAMP SWITCH(p. 71)

Push to select one of two receive RF preampli-

ers, or to bypass them.

is a wide dynamic range preamplier. It is most effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands.

is a high-gain preamplier. It is most ef-

fective for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.

selected.

Push to turn an optional AG-25, AG-35 or AG-

1200* pre-amplier unit ON or OFF, if installed.

*AG-1200 has been discontinued, but it can be still be used.

What is the preamplier?

The preamplier amplies signals in the front end to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select P. AMP or P. AMP when receiving weak signals.

(p. 71)

Hold down for 1 second to turn ON the attenua-

tor.

Push to turn OFF the attenuator.

What is the attenuator?

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being distorted when very strong signals are near it, or when very strong electromagnetic elds, such as from a broadcasting station, are near your location.

@4 (p. 76)

Push to turn the noise blanker ON or OFF. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such as that generated by vehicle ignition systems. The noise blanker is not effective for non-pulse-type noise.

Hold down for 1 second to display the NB screen. Push to return to the previous screen display.

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

@5 VOX SWITCH(p. 78)

Push to turn the VOX function ON or OFF.

Hold down for 1 second to display the VOX screen. Push to return to the previous screen display. 1

What is the VOX function?

The VOX function (voice operated transmission) automatically starts transmission when you speak

receive when you stop speaking.

(p. 79)

Push to toggle the break-in operation between semi break-in and full break-in, or to turn OFF the break-in function.

Hold down for 1 second to display the BKIN screen (Break-in). Push to return to the previous screen display.

What is the break-in function?

The break-in function automatically switches be-

tween transmit and receive with your CW keying. Using Full break-in function (QSK), you can hear the receive frequency in-between keying.

@6 MONITOR SWITCH [MONITOR] (p. 81)

Push to turn the Monitor function ON or OFF to

listen to your own transmitted audio.

-

less of the [MONITOR] switch setting.

Hold down for 1 second to display the MONI screen (Monitor) to set the monitor level. Push to return to the previous screen display.

@7 CALL SWITCH(p. 139) Push to select the call channel. GPS SWITCH(p. 121)

Hold down for 1 second to display the GPS screen. Push to return to the previous screen display.

@8 FUNCTION SWITCHES [F1][F5]

Push to select the function which is indicated on the LCD display above each switch. (p. 19)

and the operating mode. The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. 4 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Front panel (continued)

#1

#2#3#4#5 #6 #7

@9

#0

@9 MODE SWITCHES

Push to select your desired operating mode. (p. 43)

mode when the SPEECH [MODE] SW item is set to ON in the Set mode. (p. 164)

(p. 47)

Push to alternately select the USB or LSB modes.

In the SSB mode, hold down for 1 second to se-

lect the SSB data mode (USB-D, LSB-D).

D appears in addition to USB or LSB.

In the SSB data mode, push to return to the normal SSB mode.

[CW/RTTY] (pp. 48, 56)

modes.

Hold down for 1 second to switch between the CW and CW-R (CW reverse) modes, in the CW mode.

selected.

Hold down for 1 second to switch between the

selected.

[AM/FM] (p. 61)

Push to alternately select the AM or FM modes.

Hold down for 1 second to select the AM or FM

data mode (AM-D/FM-D).

D appears in addition to AM or FM.

In the data mode, push to return to the normal AM or FM mode. NOTE:

HF/50MHz frequency bands.

MHz frequency band. 5

(p. 85)

Push to select the DV mode.

Hold down for 1 second to select the DR mode.

In the DR mode, push to cancel it.

and r disappear. and r appear.

#0 FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (p. 73)

Push to select one of three IF lter settings (

).

/

/

are displayed for 2 seconds on the LCD display.

Hold down for 1 second to display the FIL screen (Filter) to set the lter passband width.

When the FIL screen is displayed, hold down for 1 second to return to the previous screen display.

#1 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH [XFC]

During split frequency or repeater operation, hold

down to listen to the transmit frequency. (p. 82)

-

quency can be changed with the main dial, keypad or memo pad.

[XFC] to cancel the dial lock function. (pp. 82, 162)

When the RIT function is turned ON, hold down to listen to the receive frequency. (RIT is temporarily cancelled.) (p. 69)

When the TX function is turned ON, hold down to listen to the transmit frequency (including TX frequency offset). (p. 81)

In the simplex operation, hold down to listen to the receive frequency.

function is temporary OFF while holding down this switch.

In the DV mode, the RX monitoring mode is se-

lected by holding down this switch. (p. 118) PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

#7

(pp. 35, 36) When the HF/50 MHz frequency band is not se-

lected in both the MAIN or SUB Band, you can se-

lect the HF/50 MHz frequency band by just holding down the band key for 1 second.

Push to select the operating band.

Pushing the same key two or three times calls up other stacked frequencies in the frequency band.

frequencies in each frequency band.

other stacked frequencies in the frequency band, after selecting the 144 MHz, 430 MHz or 1200 MHz frequency band by holding down

[BAND](MAIN/SUB) for 1 second. 1

Hold down for 1 second to switch the operating band to the HF/50 MHz frequency band.

Pushing the same key two or three times calls up other stacked frequencies in the frequency band.

(p. 37) After pushing [F-INP ENT], push the keys on the keypad to enter a frequency. After entering, push

[F-INP ENT] to set the frequency.

NOTE: The frequency band, selected in either the MAIN or SUB Band, cannot be selected on the other Band. While in the satellite mode, the keypad operation is different than described above. See page 154 for details.

#2 (pp. 32, 34)

Push to select either VFO A or VFO B.

Hold down for 1 second to equalize the undis-

played VFO settings to that of the displayed VFO.

#3 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 82)

Push to turn the split function ON or OFF.

Band.

Hold down for 1 second to activate the quick split

function.

-

quency according to the SPLIT Offset option in the Set mode. (p. 162)

the Quick SPLIT item of the Set mode. (p. 162)

#4

Push to turn the SUB Band setting mode ON or OFF. (p. 33)

appears when the SUB Band setting mode is ON.

Hold down for 1 second to turn the SUB Band display ON or OFF. (p. 32)

#5

Push to toggle between the MAIN Band and the SUB Band. (p. 32)

Hold down for 1 second several times to select HF/50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 MHz or 1200 MHz frequency band as your operating band. (p. 35)

SUB Band, cannot be selected on the other Band.

#6 SATELLITE SWITCH [SATELLITE] (p. 153)

Push to enter the satellite mode (receive on

MAIN Band, transmit on SUB Band).

and tracking icon (

) appears. appears.

/

In the satellite mode, push to return to the previ-

ous screen display. NOTE: In the DR mode, pushing [SATELLITE]

cancels DR, and then switches the transceiver to the satellite mode. If you want to operate in the DR mode after exiting the satellite mode, you must hold down

Hold down for 1 second to transfer the uplink and downlink frequencies into the satellite VFO.

transferring.

appears. appears.

/

)

reverse, push [NOR/REV] (7 3).

In the satellite mode, hold down for 1 second to return to normal operation using the displayed frequencies. The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 6 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Front panel (continued)

#8 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]

Push to switch between the VFO and memory modes. (pp. 34, 139)

Hold down for 1 second to copy the memory con-

tents to the displayed VFO on the MAIN Band.

(p. 142)

#9 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. 144)

Push to write the displayed data into a memo pad.

10 in the Memopad Numbers item of the Set mode.

(p. 164)

$0 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 140) Hold down for 1 second to store VFO data into the selected memory channel.

$1 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. 144)

Push to sequentially call up the contents from the memo pads. The 5 (or 10) most recently programmed frequen-

cies and operating modes can be recalled, starting from the most recent.

10 in the Memopad Numbers item of the Set mode.

(p. 164)

#8 #9$0 $1 $2

$4$3

$5

$6

$7

$8

$9

%0

$2 MEMORY CLEAR SWITCH [M-CLR] (p. 141) In the Memory mode, hold down for 1 second to clear the memory channel.

This switch is disabled in the VFO mode.

$3

(p. 38)

Push to toggle between the kHz and MHz* quick

tuning step, or turn OFF the quick tuning.

* When the HF/50 MHz frequency band is selected, MHz step cannot be selected.

Z quick tuning icon is displayed above the kHz or MHz digit, the frequency is changed in programmed quick tuning steps or 1 MHz steps.

changed in 10 Hz steps.

When the quick tuning is ON, hold down for 1 second to display the TS screen (Tuning Step) to select the quick tuning step. (p. 38)

steps are independently selectable for each operat-

ing mode.

When the quick tuning is OFF, hold down for 1 second to turn the minimum tuning step of 1 Hz ON or OFF. (p. 39)

(p. 93)

Push to switch the call sign group.

Hold down for 1 second to enter the repeater call sign group selection mode.

blinks.

When in the repeater group selection mode, push to cancel it.

7

$4 (p. 75)

Push to display the lter passband width and shifting value for 1 second on the function dis-

play.

Hold down for 1 second to reset the PBT set-

tings.

$5

(p. 75)

Adjusts the receivers IF filter passband width using the DSP circuit.

Rotate this control or push [PBT-CLR] to display the PBT settings (passband width and shifting value) for 2 seconds on the function display.

settings.

the value is adjustable in 25 Hz steps for the SSB, CW,

What is the PBT control?

The PBT function electronically modies the IF passband width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP circuit for the PBT function. PBT2 PBT1

+

High cut Center Low cut

$6 (p. 33)

Push to turn the SUB Dial function ON or OFF.

appears when the SUB Dial function is ON. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

$7

Rotate to change the SUB Band frequency. Increases Decreases The [SUB DIAL] controls tuning Band (MAIN or SUB) and frequency steps differ, depending on the combination of the SUB Dial function and SUB Band setting mode status, and the status of the quick tuning function. See page 33 for de-

tails. 1

$8 MEMORY CHANNEL CONTROL [M-CH]

Select a memory channel.

-

ory channel number. Higher channel Lower channel

$9 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. 69)

TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.

Push to turn the RIT function ON or OFF.

Hold down for 1 second to add the shift frequency of the RIT function to or subtract it from the dis-

played frequency.

What is the RIT function?

The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive frequency without shifting the transmit frequency. This is useful for ne tuning stations calling you off-fre-

quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-

sounding voice characteristics, etc.

%0 TX SWITCH [TX] (p. 81)

TX] control to vary the TX frequency.

Push to turn the TX function ON or OFF.

Hold down for 1 second to add the shift fre-

quency of the TX function to or subtract it from the displayed frequency.

What is the TX function?

TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-

ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency operation in CW, etc. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 8 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Front panel (continued)

%1

%2

%3

%4

%1 MAIN DIAL (pp. 37, 161) Rotate to change the displayed frequency, select the Set mode settings, etc.

%4 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH [SPEECH/LOCK]

SPEECH SWITCH(p. 45)

Push to audibly announce the S-meter level, the When the SUB Band setting mode is ON, rotat-

ing [MAIN DIAL] changes the SUB Band fre-

quency. (p. 33)

displayed frequency and the operating mode.

in the SPEECH S-Level item of the Set mode.

(p. 164)

TX are ON, the RIT/TX offset is not included in the frequency announcement. LOCK SWITCH(p. 77)

Hold down for 1 second to turn the Dial Lock function ON or OFF.

appears when the function is ON. NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation to activate the voice synthesizer or the dial lock functions can be replaced in the [SPEECH/

LOCK] SW item of the Set mode. (p. 164)

%2 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pp. 69, 81) Hold down for 1 second* to clear the RIT/TX shift frequency.

* When the Quick RIT Clear item in the Set mode is ON, push momentarily to reset the shift frequency.

(p. 164)

%3 RIT/TX CONTROL [RIT/TX] (pp. 69, 81) When either or both the RIT/TX functions are ON, rotate to adjust the RIT/TX frequency shift.

or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

The control tunes in 1 Hz steps when the operating fre-

quency readout is set to the 1 Hz step readout. How-

ever, the 1 Hz digit is not displayed on the frequency shift readout. Shift high Shift low

9 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

i u y q w e r t y

(pp. 24, 25, 158) Connect a 50 antenna with a type-N connector for the 430 MHz frequency band. u

(pp. 24, 25, 158) Connect a 50 antenna with a PL-259 connector for the 144 MHz frequency band. i DC POWER SOCKET [DC 13.8V] (p. 27) Connect 13.8 V DC through the supplied DC power cable. Rear panel view q ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT1]

w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT2]

(pp. 24, 25, 158) Connect a 50 antenna with a PL-259 plug con-

nector for the HF/50 MHz frequency band. When using an optional AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTO-

MATIC ANTENNA TUNER, connect it to the [ANT1]

connector. Connecting the AH-4 switches the in-

ternal antenna tuner from [ANT1] to [ANT2]. e

(pp. 24, 158) Connect a 1200 MHz 50 antenna with a type-N connector, when the optional UX-9100, 1200 MHz band unit, is installed. r t

(p. 25) Connect to an external speaker (4 to 8 ). By connecting an external speaker to each or both jacks, the audio output for both the MAIN and SUB Bands can be congured as shown below.

MAIN AF

No connection To the MAIN jack External speaker To the SUB jack Internal speaker Internal speaker External speaker Internal speaker

Both External speakers 1 10 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Rear panel (Continued) o

!0

!2!1

!3

!4

!5

!6 !7

!8 o GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 22) Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri-

cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.

!4 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 25) Connect to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom linear amplier.

!5 SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. 25) When transmitting, goes to ground to control an ex-

ternal unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplier.

!6 ACCESSORY SOCKET [ACC]

Connect control lines for external equipment such as a linear amplier, an automatic antenna selector/

tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc.

!7 CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]

(pp. 26, 183)

Connect a PC, using the optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER, for external control of the transceiver.

Use for transceive function with another Icom CI-V transceiver or receiver. When the transceive function is set to ON, changing the frequency, operating mode, etc. on the IC-9100 automatically changes those settings on other Icom transceivers or receivers, and vice versa. (p. 167)

Connect another IC-9100, using a mini plug cable*, for transceiver to transceiver cloning.

* Purchase separately

!0 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 29) Connect the control cable from an optional AH-4 HF/

50 MHZ AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.

!1 DATA1 JACK [DATA1] (p. 26, 168)

Connect a PC through the optional OPC-1529R DATA COMMUNICATION CABLE, for low-speed data communication in the DV mode. (p. 117)

Connect a GPS receiver through the optional OPC-1529R DATA COMMUNICATION CABLE, for GPS operation. (p. 121)

!2 DATA2 SOCKET [DATA2] (pp. 26, 171) Connect a TNC (Terminal Node Controller), etc. for high speed data communications.

!3 STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 24) Connect a straight key or external electronic keyer output using a standard 14 inch plug.

straight key or external electronic keyer. First you must turn OFF the internal electronic keyer in the Keyer Set mode. (p. 55)

+

_

11

!8 Using a USB cable, connect a PC to do the follow-

ing:

- Input modulation (p. 167)

- Remotely control the transceiver using CI-V com-

mands (p. 183)

- Send the received audio to the PC

- Send the decoded characters to the PC

(pp. 59, 167)

- Low-speed data communication in the DV mode

(p. 167)

- Cloning using the optional CS-9100 CLONING SOFT-

WARE (p. 182)

The USB driver and the installation guide can be downloaded from our website.

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html

The following items are required:

PC

Windows XP, Microsoft Windows Vista or Microsoft Windows 7 OS

9100) NEVER connect the transceiver to a PC until the USB driver installation has been completed.

Select USB in the Set mode item DATA OFF MOD or DATA MOD. The modulation input level from the USB jack can be set in the Set mode item USB MOD Level. (p. 167) PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 1 12 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Rear panel (Continued) D

ACC PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION 13 9 10 11 12 8765 1 2 3 4 Rear panel view gray q brown white w red black e orange r yellow pink light t green blue y blue light u purple green i o

!0

!1

!2

!3 Color refers to the cable strands of the supplied cable. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 8 V Regulated 8 V output. GND Connects to ground. HSEND

*1, 2 Input/out-

put pin. An external equipment controls the transceiver. When this pin goes low, the transceiver trans-

mits. The transceiver outputs a low signal to control exter-

nal equipment. NC BAND Band voltage output. ALC ALC voltage input. VSEND

*1, 2 Input/out-

put pin. An external equipment controls the transceiver. When this pin goes low, the transceiver trans-

mits. The transceiver outputs a low signal to control exter-

nal equipment. Output voltage Output current SPECIFICATIONS

: 8 V 0.3 V

: Less than 10 mA Input voltage (High) Input voltage (Low) Current ow

: 2.0 V to 20.0 V

: 0.5 V to +0.8 V

: Max. 20 mA Output voltage (Low) Current ow

: Less than 0.1 V

: Max. 200 mA Output voltage Control voltage Input impedance

: 0 to 8 V

: 3 V to 0 V

: More than 3.3 k Input voltage (High) Input voltage (Low) Current ow

: 2.0 V to 20.0 V

: 0.5 V to +0.8 V

: Max. 20 mA Output voltage (Low) Current ow

: Less than 0.1 V

: Max. 200 mA 13.8 V NC 13.8 V output when power is ON. Output current

: Less than 1 A FSKK

MOD Modulator input. AF*3 AF detector output. Fixed level, regardless of the [AF]

control position. SQL S*3 Squelch output. Grounded when squelch opens. High level Low level Output current Input impedance Input level

: More than 2.4 V

: Less than 0.6 V

: Less than 2 mA

: 10 k

: Approx. 100 mV rms Output impedance Output level

: 4.7 k

: 100 to 300 mV rms SQL open SQL closed

: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA

: More than 6.0 V/100 A

*1 When the SEND terminal controls the inductive load (such as a relay), a counter-electromotive force can cause the transceivers malfunction or damage. To prevent this, we recommend adding a switching diode, such as an 1SS133, on the load side of the circuit to the counter-electromotive force absorption. When the diode is added, a switching delay of the relay may occur. Be sure to check its switching action before operation. Switching diode e ACC socket eHSEND or uVSEND i13.8 V To a non-Icom linear amplifier Relay

*2 VSEND is used for the 144 MHz, 430 MHz, and 1200 MHz bands, and HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz bands

*3 can change this setting in ACC AF/SQL Select of the Set mode. (p. 166) 13 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

Connect to ACC socket ACC 1

!3 o !0 !1 !2 t y u i q w e r 2 8 5 3 7 4 1 6 ACC 2 2 5 3 7 4 1 6 q FSKK w GND e HSEND r MOD t AF y SQLS u 13.8 V i ALC q 8 V w GND e HSEND r BAND t ALC y VSEND u 13.8 V 1 DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS D NAME PIN No. DATA2 q w e r t y Rear panel view 1 2 3 4 5 DATA IN GND PTT Input terminal for data transmit.

(1200 bps: AFSK/

9600 bps: G3RUH, GMSK) Common ground for DATA IN, DATA OUT and AF OUT. PTT terminal for packet operation. Connect to ground to activate the transmitter. DATA OUT* Data out terminal for 9600 bps op-

eration only. AF OUT* Data out terminal for 1200 bps op-

6 SQL*

eration only. Squelch out terminal. This pin is grounded when the transceiver re-

ceives a signal which opens the squelch.

connect squelch to the TNC to inhibit transmission when squelch is open.

-

erwise a SQL signal will not be out-

put. Input level (1200 bps) Input level (9600 bps)

: 100 mV

: 0.2 to 0.5 Vp-p Input voltage (High) Input voltage (Low)

: 2.0 V to 20.0 V

: 0.5 V to +0.8 V Output impedance Output level Output impedance Output level SQL open SQL closed

: 10 k

: 1.0 Vp-p

: 4.7 k

: 100300 mV rms

: Less than 0.3 V/

5 mA

: More than 6.0 V/

100 A

* The pin 4 (DATA), pin 5 (AF) and pin 6 (SQL) output capabilities are for the MAIN Bands AF and squelch by de-

14 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

q w e r q w t q FREQUENCY READOUTS

Displays the operating frequency.

Z is displayed, the fre-

quency changes in pre-set kHz or 1 MHz quick tuning steps. (p. 38)

Z is not displayed, the fre-

quency changes in 10 Hz or 1 Hz steps. (pp. 37, 39) w MULTI-FUNCTION METER INDICATION

Displays the signal strength while receiving.

Displays the relative output power, SWR, ALC or compression levels while transmitting.

When the Meter Peak Hold function is ON, the peak level of a received signal strength or the output power is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds. e ANTENNA ICON (p. 158) Displays which antenna connector is selected for HF/50 MHz.

-

lected.

-

lected.

r ANTENNA TUNER ICONS (pp. 159, 160)

appears when the antenna tuner is

blinks during tuning. appears when the optional AH-4 external antenna tuner is connected to the [ANT1] con-

nector, and [ANT1] is selected. t FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 19) Shows the function of the function switches ([F1]

[F5]), Set mode items and IF passband width. 15

!0

!2

!1 o i u y

!0 o i u y y MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS Displays the selected memory channel. u SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL ICON

Appears when the selected memory channel is set as a select memory channel. (p. 151)

Appears when the repeater can be selected as the access repeater in the DR mode. (p. 100) i DR MODE ICON (p. 43) Appears when the DR mode is selected. o RIT/TX ICONS (pp. 69, 81)

RIT appears when the RIT function is turned

TX appears when the TX function is turned

Shows the shift frequency of the RIT or TX ON. ON. function.

!0 VOICE SQUELCH CONTROL ICON (p. 146) Appears when the VSC (Voice Squelch Control) function is turned ON.

!1 DUPLEX ICON (p. 65) DUP+ appears when plus duplex, DUP ap-

pears when minus duplex (repeater) operation is selected.

!2 KEY LOCK ICON (p. 77) Appears when the Key Lock function is turned ON. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

!5

!4

!3

!6

!7

!8

!9

@0 1

!5

!4

!3

!3 TONE SQUELCH ICONS

T appears when the repeater tone function is

ON. (p. 65)

TSQL appears when the tone squelch function is ON. (p. 62)

DTCS appears when the DTCS code squelch function is ON. (p. 63)

DSQL appears when the digital call sign squelch function is ON. (p. 114)

CSQL appears when digital code squelch func-

tion is ON. (p. 114)

!4 PACKET LOSS ICON

Appears when the Packet Loss occurs.

communication via the internet network, some packets may be lost due to network error (poor data throughput performance). (p. 117)

!5 MODE ICONS (p. 43)

Displays the selected operating mode.

D appears when SSB data, AM data or FM data mode is selected.

!6 (p. 116)

Appears when the Break-in function is turned ON.

The Break-in function allows you to break into a con-

versation, where the two original stations are com-

municating with call sign squelch enabled.

Blinks when receiving a break-in call.

!7 EMR MODE ICON (p. 115)

Appears when the EMR (Enhanced Monitor Re-

ceive) communication mode is selected.

-

ting is necessary when operating in the DV mode.

Blinks when receiving an EMR signal.

!8 VOX ICON (p. 78) Appears when the VOX function is activated.

!9 SPEECH COMPRESSOR ICON (p. 80) Appears when the Speech Compressor function is turned ON.

@0 SATELLITE ICON (p. 153) Appears while the satellite mode is selected.

: Normal satellite mode is selected.

is rotated, both down-

link and uplink frequencies simultaneously increase or decrease in the same step.

: Reverse satellite mode is selected.

is rotated to the right, downlink frequency increase, and uplink frequency decrease in the same step.

is rotated to the left, downlink frequency decrease, and uplink frequency increase in the same step. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 16 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

LCD display (Continued)

@7

@6 @5

@4

@3

@2

@1

@8

@9

#0

#1

@4

@3

@2

@7 GPS ICON (p. 132)

Appears when a valid position data is received from a GPS receiver that is connected to the

[DATA1] jack.

Blinks when an invalid data is received from the GPS receiver.

@8 GPS ALARM ICON (p. 130) Appears when the GPS alarm function is turned ON.

@9(p. 79)

F BK-IN appears when the Full Break-in func-

tion is turned ON.

BK-IN appears when the Semi Break-in func-

tion is turned ON.

#0 MONITOR ICON (p. 81) Appears when the Monitor function is turned ON.

#1(p. 33) Appears when the SUB Band setting mode is ON.

@1 SPLIT ICON (p. 82)

Appears when the Split function is turned ON.

@2 DSP FILTER ICON (p. 73)

Displays the selected IF lter.

@3 AGC ICONS (p. 72)

Displays the selected AGC time constant.

-OFF for AGC OFF.

@4 PREAMP ICON (p. 71) for AGC fast is xed.

Appears when a preamplier is turned ON.

or P. AMP is displayed when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON.

@5 GPS DATA COMMUNICATION ICON Appears while the GPS data communication func-

tion is selected in the GPS Out item of the Set mode. (p. 168).

to the [DATA1] jack, is output to the [USB] port.

@6 GPS TX ICON (p. 134)

GPS appears when the GPS transmission mode is set to GPS.

GPS-A appears when GPS transmission mode is set to GPS-A. 17 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

#5

#4

#3#2

$1

#9

#8

#7

#6

$1

$0

#9

#8

#7

#6 1

#5

#4

#3 #2

$0(p. 33) Appears when the SUB Dial function is turned ON.

$1 14 TUNING DIAL SPEED ICON (p. 39)

Appears when the tuning dial speed is set so that one rotation is equal to 14 of the normal rotation.

function is turned OFF.

#2 NOISE REDUCTION ICON (p. 77) Appears when the Noise Reduction function is turned ON.

#3(p. 76) Appears when the Noise Blanker function is turned ON.

#4 NOTCH ICONS (p. 77)

MNF appears when the Manual Notch function

is turned ON.

ANF appears when the Automatic Notch func-

tion is turned ON.

#5 ATTENUATOR ICON (p. 71) Appears when the Attenuator function is turned ON.

#6 MEMORY ICON (pp. 34, 139) Appears when the memory mode is selected.

#7 VFO ICONS (p. 34) Displays whether VFO A or VFO B is selected.

#8(p. 139) Appears when the selected memory channel is blank.

#9 AFC ICON (p. 69)

Appears when the AFC (Automatic Frequency Con-

trol) function is turned ON. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 18 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Push [MENU] to toggle the function display menu.

change according to the selected menu and operat-

ing mode.

menu 3) display can be selected after selecting menu 2.

-

lected. Push to select the functions displayed in the display above switches ([F-1] to [F-5])

D

AGC DUP COMP TBW SCP D SCAN MEM SWR TCON VSC

AGC DUP 1 4 SCP D

<MODE> DV CS CD R>CS UR DSET

<MODE> CW AGC DUP 1 4

SCP

<MODE> RTTY AGC DUP 1 4

SCP D

<MODE> DV (Only when is displayed.) CS CD R>CS UR DSET

<MODE> AM AGC DUP

<MODE> FM SCP D

<MODE> DV (Only when is displayed.) SCAN SEL AFC DSQ TCON AGC DUP AFC TON SCP

<MODE> DV AGC DUP AFC DSQ SCP 19 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 D

(p. 72)

Push to select the time constant of the AGC circuit.

Hold down for 1 second to display the AGC screen.

(pp. 6264)

Push to select a tone function between subaudible

(repeater) tone, tone squelch and DTCS code.

Hold down for 1 second to display the TON screen of the selected tone function.

(p. 65)

Push to select the duplex direction, or to turn OFF the function.

In the FM mode, hold down for 1 second to turn the one-touch repeater function ON or OFF.

(p. 80)

Push to turn the speech compressor function ON or OFF.

ON.

Hold down for 1 second to display the COMP screen. 14 TUNING FUNCTION KEY [14(p. 39)

Push to turn the 14 Tuning function ON or OFF. is displayed when the 14 Tuning function is ON.

(p. 69)

Push to turn the AFC function ON or OFF.

is displayed when the AFC function is ON.

(p. 80)

Push to display the selected transmission band-

width.

Hold down for 1 second to select the transmission bandwidth.

and narrow (NAR).

(p. 50)

Push to display the screen (memory keyer) or the SEND 1st Menu option in the Set mode (p. 165).

(p. 57)

(p. 114)

Push to select a digital squelch function between digital call sign squelch and digital code squelch.

Hold down for 1 second to display the DSQ screen

(digital squelch). 1

(p. 70) Push to display the SCP screen (band scope). D

(p. 147) Push to display the SCAN screen.

(p. 143) Push to display the MEM screen (memory name edit).

(p. 84) Push to display the SWR screen.

(p. 169) Push to enter the Tone Control Set mode.

(p. 146)

Push to turn the VSC (Voice Squelch Control) function ON or OFF.

appears when the VSC function is ON. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 20 D

(Only when

Push to start or cancel the Access repeater scan. is displayed.)

(p. 100)

Hold down for 1 second to enter the Scan Set mode.

(p. 147)

(p. 100) Hold down for 1 second to set the repeater as a ac-

cess repeater scan target.

(p. 69) Push to turn the AFC function ON or OFF.

is displayed when the AFC function is ON.

(p. 114)

Push to select a digital squelch function between digital call sign squelch and digital code squelch.

Hold down for 1 second to display the DSQ screen

(digital squelch).

(p. 169) Push to enter the Tone Control Set mode. 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

Function display (Continued) D

(p. 85) Push to display the CS screen.

(p. 95) Push to display the CD screen.

appears. (RX01 to RX20)

(p. 96) Hold down for 1 second to copy and set the previously received station call sign as the station call sign for making a call.

(p. 101) Push to toggle the UR and the repeater call sign selection screen.

(p. 118) Push to enter the DV Set mode. D

(Only when

(p. 85) Push to display the CS screen.

is displayed.)

(p. 95) Push to display the CD screen.

(p. 96) Hold down for 1 second to copy and set the previously received station call sign as the station call sign for making a call.

(p. 101) Push to toggle the UR and the repeater call sign selection screen.

(p. 118) Push to enter the DV Set mode. 21 The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-

quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-

ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources. The base of the transceiver has adjustable feet for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles, to meet your operating preference.

To prevent electrical shock, television interference

(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-

lems, ground the transceiver using the GROUND ter-

minal on the rear panel. For best results, connect a heaviest gauge wire or strap to a long ground rod. Make the distance between the [GND] terminal and ground as short as possible. R WARNING! NEVER connect the [GND] ter-

minal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connection could cause an explosion or electric shock.

[GND]

ELEC-KEY

(dot)

(com)

(dash) MICROPHONES (p. 30) A straight key can also be connected. However, Straight key must be selected in the Keyer Type item of the Keyer Set mode. (p. 55) HM-36 SM-50

(Option) SM-30

(Option) 2 22 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

For radio communications, the antenna is of critical importance, along with output power and receiver sen-

sitivity. Select a well-matched 50 antenna and co-

axial cable feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) on your operat-

ing bands. The transmission line should be a coaxial cable. When using a single antenna (for the HF/50 MHz band), use the [ANT1] connector. CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning by using a lightning arrestor.

Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency range and the SWR usually increases outside the range. When the SWR is higher than approximately 2.0:1, the transceiver automatically reduces the TX power to protect the nal transistors. In that case, an antenna tuner is useful to match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full power for transmit-

ting. The IC-9100 has an SWR meter to continuously monitor the antenna SWR. PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE TYPE-N CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE 30 mm Coupling ring 10 mm (tin here) 10 mm tin 12 mm solder solder q w e r Slide the coupling ring down. Strip the cable jacket and tin the shield. Strip the cable as shown at left. Tin the center conductor. Slide the connector body on and solder it. Screw the coupling ring onto the connec-

tor body. q w e r Nut Rubber gasket 15 mm Washer Clamp Center conductor 3 mm 6 mm Solder hole No space Be sure the center conductor is the same height as the plug body. and Slide the nut, rubber gasket clamp over the coaxial cable, then cut the end of the cable evenly. Strip the cable and fold the braid back over the clamp. Tin the center con-

ductor. the center conductor pin and solder it. Install slide Carefully the plug body into place aligning the center conductor pin on the cable. Tighten the nut onto the plug body. 30 mm (98 in) 10 mm (38 in) 12 mm (116 in) 23 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

(p. 158)

(p. 158)

D DC POWER SUPPLY

(p. 27) PS-126

(p. 158) Connection example:

[ANT1] for 1.818 MHz bands antenna

[ANT2] for 2128 MHz bands antenna GROUND (p. 22) STRAIGHT KEY

(p. 158) Use the heaviest possible gauge wire or strap and make the connection as short as possible. Grounding prevents elec-

trical shocks, TVI and other problems.

+

_ The optional UX-9100 is required. 2 24 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

D HEADPHONES MIC The AFSK modulation signal can also be input to [MIC]. (p. 171) D PREAMP (p. 71)

(144 MHz and 430 MHz) 144 MHz : AG-25 (option) 430 MHz : AG-35 (option) External all-weather, mast-mounted preampliers are available. CAUTION: NEVER connect a power or SWR meter, or other device between the transceiver and preamplier. with AH-4 (option)

(p. 29) AH-2b (option) or long wire

(p. 29) Used for connecting a non-Icom linear amplier.

(pp. 28, 29) Connect a linear amplifier, antenna selector, etc. EXTERNAL SPEAKER

(MAIN/SUB) SP-23

(option) 25 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

EXTERNAL KEYPAD Connect an external keypad for keyer memory control. When using a external keypad, select

-

pad item of the Set mode. (p. 167) 4.7 k 5%

2.2 k 5%

1.5 k 5%

1.5 k 5%

To pin e S4

(M4) S3

(M3) S2

(M2) S1

(M1) To pin u 2 1 7 2 6 5 8 3 4

[MIC]

EXTERNAL KEYPAD

(Front view)

REMOTE JACK, (p. 183) Used for computer control and transceive operation. The optional CT-17 is re-

quired when connecting a PC to [REMOTE]. DATA1 JACK (pp. 117, 121) Connect the optional OPC-1529R for low speed data communication using a PC and the transceiver, or for the GPS receiver connection. A third-party serial data communication software is required. DATA2 SOCKET

(pp. 14, 171) ACC SOCKET

(pp. 13, 171) 26 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

When operating the transceiver with AC power, use a power supply with 13.8 V DC output and a capacity of at least 24 Amperes. Refer to the diagrams below. CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power cable, check the following important items. Make sure:

when you use a non-Icom power supply.

Red : Positive + terminal Black : Negative _ terminal

D AC outlet PS-126 To [DC 13.8V]

AC cable DC power cable Ground Transceiver D Transceiver For European versions Transceiver AC outlet Ground A DC power supply To [DC 13.8V]

To [GND]

To [DC 13.8V]

Connect to power supply

at least 24 A

+

_ AC cable Red Black Supplied DC power cable 27 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

D To an antenna [ACC1]

Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/PW1EURO) ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/PW1EURO) 7-pin side

[ANT]

[REMOTE]

Coaxial cable

(supplied with the IC-PW1/

PW1EURO)

[INPUT1]

Coaxial cable*

OPC-599

[INPUT2]

[ACC]

[REMOTE]

[ANT1]

[ANT2]

EXCITER 1 1&2

[GND]

IC-PW1/EURO AC outlet

(Non-European versions: 100120/200240 V European version

: 230 V)

[GND]

Ground Transceiver

*Purchase separately, and connect to [INPUT2], if necessary. 2 28 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

Linear amplier connections (Continued) D To an antenna 50 coaxial cable RF OUTPUT RF INPUT GND ALC SEND Non-Icom linear amplier Ground

[ANT1]

Transceiver

[GND]

[ALC]

[SEND]

R WARNING!

-

struction manual.

matched ALC and RF power settings could overheat or damage the linear amplier.

external relay must be used.

D The AH-4 must be connected to [ANT1]. Coaxial cable (from the AH-4)

[ANT1]

Transceiver AH-4 Ground

[TUNER]

Control cable Ground 29 Long wire or optional AH-2b

(Front panel view) i Main bands AF output

(varies with [AF]) q Microphone input w +8 V DC output u GND

(Microphone ground) y GND (PTT ground) e Frequency up/down t PTT r Main bands squelch switch

D HM-36 q w D SM-50 (Option) q r w e INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

[MIC]

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION w e r

+8 V DC output Frequency up Frequency down Squelch open Squelch closed Max. 10 mA Ground Ground through 470 Low level High level CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this can damage the internal 8 V regulator. DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation. Use caution when using a non-Icom microphone. 2 q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]

Push to change the frequency or memory channel.

number continuously increases or decreases.

[XFC], push to change the transmit frequency.

the MIC Up/Down Keyer item setting is ON in the Keyer Set mode. In such case, the frequency and mem-

ory channel cannot be changed using the [UP]/[DN]

switches. (p. 55)

in the Paddle Polarity item of the Keyer Set mode. When Normal is selected, [UP] sends a dash, and

[DN] sends a dot. (p. 55)

w PTT SWITCH

e PTT LOCK SWITCH (available on only the SM-50) Push to toggle between transmit and receive. r LOW CUT SWITCH (available on only the SM-50) Push to cut out the low frequency components of input voice signals. 30 3

Before turning ON your transceiver for the rst time, make sure all connections required for your system are complete by reviewing them in Section 2 of this manual.

[NOTCH]

: 12 oclock

[RF/SQL]

: 12 oclock

[NR]

: Max. CCW

[AF]

: Max. CCW

[MIC GAIN]

: 12 oclock After all connections have been made, set controls and switches as shown in the illustration below. CW : Max. clockwise CCW : Max. counterclockwise

[RF POWER]

: Max. CW

[CW PITCH]

: 12 oclock

: 1012 oclock

First time to Power ON:

Reset the transceiver using the following procedure. A partial resetting CLEARS the operating parame-

ters to their default values (VFO frequency, VFO settings, menu groups contents) without clearing certain data. See page 181 for details.

q Make sure the transceivers power is OFF. w While holding down both [F-INP ENT] and [VFO/

MEMO], push [POWER] to turn ON the transceiver.

RESET, then its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete.

disappears, the resetting will be cancelled. e Change the Set mode settings to suit your operat-

ing needs. (p. 161) Normal Power ON:

Push [POWER] to turn ON the transceiver. Power OFF:

Hold down [POWER] for 1 second to turn OFF the transceiver. 31

[POWER]

[VFO/MEMO]

[F-INP ENT]

PARTIAL RESET M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P Initial VFO display BASIC OPERATION 3 Both MAIN and SUB Bands have independent features. MAIN Band : Used for both transmitting and receiving. The MAIN Band area is in the upper half of the LCD display. SUB Band : Used for only receiving. The SUB Band area is in the lower half of the LCD display.

SUB Band. However, while operating in the Satellite mode, you can transmit on the SUB Band.

[MAIN/SUB]

3 3

The IC-9100 can operate on the HF/50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 MHz and 1200 MHz* frequency bands. These fre-

quency bands can be assigned to the MAIN and SUB Bands for operating convenience. The MAIN and SUB Bands cannot simultaneously oper-

ate on frequency bands within the HF/50 MHz band. For example, if the MAIN Band is set to operate on any fre-

quency within the HF/50MHz band, the SUB Band can simultaneously receive on only the 144 MHz, 430 MHz and 1200 MHz* frequency bands, or visa versa.

*The optional UX-9100 is required for the 1200 MHz fre-

quency band operation. D The LCD display shows both the MAIN and SUB Band frequencies. Both Bands can receive signals simulta-

neously, but not on the same frequency band. Set the frequency band you want to transmit or be called on, as the MAIN Band.

Push [MAIN/SUB] to toggle the MAIN and SUB Bands. MAIN Band display (14.100 MHz USB) MAIN Band display (146.520 MHz FM) Push SUB Band display (146.520 MHz FM) SUB Band display (14.100 MHz USB) D The SUB Band display can be turned OFF to simplify operation.

[SUB]

Hold down [SUB] for 1 second to turn the SUB Band display ON or OFF.

turned OFF.

SUB Band display When the SUB Band display is OFF 32 32 3 BASIC OPERATION D Normally, tuning, operating mode selection, memory channel selection and programming, are made for the MAIN Band. When the SUB Band setting mode is ON, the settings and selections are for only the SUB Band.

[SUB]

Push [SUB] to turn the SUB Band setting mode ON appears when the SUB Band setting mode is

or OFF.

ON. Disappears Appears Push The SUB Band setting mode is OFF. The SUB Band setting mode is ON. D The [SUB DIAL] controls tuning Band and frequency steps differ, depending on the combination of the SUB Dial function and SUB Band setting mode, and the sta-

tus of the quick tuning function.

Push [SUB DIAL] to turn the SUB Dial function ON or OFF.

appears when the function is ON.

[SUB DIAL]

[SUB DIAL] control

(

appears when ON is selected.)

(

appears when ON is selected.) ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SUB Band*

SUB Band*

SUB Band MAIN Band Appears when the SUB Dial function is ON.

* The frequency changes in 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 1 MHz or pre-set kHz steps, depending on the quick tuning step setting. (p. 38) The frequency changes in the programmed kHz steps, even if the quick tuning is OFF. 33 BASIC OPERATION 3

[A/B]

3 The selected VFO icon Displayed VFO Undisplayed VFO q Hold down e Push

[VFO/MEMO]

and SUB Bands, and are convenient for quickly select-

ing two frequencies can use either VFO to call up a frequency and operat-

ing mode. VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscil-

lator. D

Push [A/B] to switch between the VFO A and VFO B.

D

Hold down [A/B] for 1 second to equalize the data in both VFOs.

CONVENIENT!

When you nd a new station, but wish to continue searching, the dual VFO system can be used for quick memory storage. q Hold down [A/B] for 1 second to store the displayed contents into the undisplayed VFO. w Continue searching for stations. e Push [A/B] to show the stored contents on the un-

displayed VFO. r To continue searching for stations, push [A/B] again to show the displayed VFO.

Push [VFO/MEMO] to switch between the VFO and memory modes.

or MEMO and the selected memory channel number appear when in the memory mode.

contents of the selected memory channel into the dis-

played VFO. (p. 142) The selected VFO icon Memory icon Memory channel number 34 3 BASIC OPERATION

The frequency band you want to use can be selected in the MAIN and SUB Bands. Before changing the frequency band on the SUB Band, push [SUB] to turn ON the SUB Band setting mode. In addition to the HF/50 MHz, 144 MHz and 430 MHz frequency bands, the IC-9100 can operate on the 1200 MHz frequency band*1. q Hold down [BAND](MAIN/SUB) for 1 second sev-

eral times until the desired frequency of the bands that are stored in the MAIN or SUB Band, which-

ever you selected. w To call up the previously selected frequency and op-

HF/50 MHz frequency band was selected in step q,

144 MHz, 430 MHz or 1200 MHz frequency band*1 was selected. D The triple band stacking register provides 3 memo-

ries for each band key to store frequencies and oper-

ating modes. This function is convenient when you operate 3 operat-

ing modes on one frequency band. For example, one register can be used for a CW fre-

quency, another for an SSB frequency and the other

[BAND](MAIN/SUB) Band keys

NOTE: The same frequency band cannot be simul-

taneously selected in both MAIN and SUB Bands. The frequency band, selected in either the MAIN or SUB Band, cannot be selected on the other Band.

used frequency and operating mode are called up. When the key is pushed again, another stored fre-

quency and operating mode are called up.

* If you are using a frequency band other than HF/50 MHz, you can call up the HF/50 MHz frequency band by pushing

See the table below for a list of the available frequency bands and their default frequency and mode settings.

1.8 MHz 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 10 MHz 14 MHz 18 MHz 21 MHz 24 MHz 28 MHz 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz*1 General*2 REGISTER 1 1.900000 MHz CW 3.550000 MHz LSB 7.050000 MHz LSB 10.120000 MHz CW 14.100000 MHz USB 18.100000 MHz USB 21.200000 MHz USB 24.950000 MHz USB 28.500000 MHz USB 50.100000 MHz USB 146.520000 MHz FM 446.000000 MHz FM 1294.500000 MHz FM 15.000000 MHz USB REGISTER 2 1.910000 MHz CW 3.560000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 10.130000 MHz CW 14.200000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 145.100000 MHz FM 440.100000 MHz FM 1295.100000 MHz FM 15.100000 MHz USB REGISTER 3 1.915000 MHz CW 3.580000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW 14.050000 MHz CW 18.150000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW 24.900000 MHz CW 28.100000 MHz CW 51.000000 MHz FM 145.200000 MHz FM 440.200000 MHz FM 1294.200000 MHz FM 15.200000 MHz USB

*1 The optional UX-9100 is required for the 1200 MHz frequency band operation.

*2 35 BASIC OPERATION 3

q Hold down [BAND](MAIN/SUB) for 1 second sev-

eral times until a HF/50 MHz frequency band is dis-

played.

14 MHz frequency band w

are called up as the rst band stacking register of that frequency band. e Select a frequency and an operating mode, and then push the band key.

that frequency bands rst band stacking register. r Select another frequency and operating mode, and then push the band key.

that frequency bands second band stacking register. t Select another frequency and operating mode, and then push the band key.

that frequency bands third band stacking register. y The rst band stacking register set in step e, is called up.

-

rized triple band stacking registers are sequentially called up.

q Hold down [BAND](MAIN/SUB) for 1 second sev-

eral times until a 144 MHz, 430 MHz or 1200 MHz frequency band is displayed.

mode are called up as the rst band stacking register of that frequency band. w Select a frequency and an operating mode, and

that frequency bands rst band stacking register. e Select another frequency and operating mode, and

that frequency bands second band stacking register. r Select another frequency and operating mode, and

that frequency bands third band stacking register. t The rst band stacking register set in step w, is called up.

stacking registers are sequentially called up.

The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. Hold down Push Push Push

430 MHz frequency band Hold down Push Push Push 3 36 3 BASIC OPERATION

[MAIN DIAL], or you can enter it using the keypad. D q Select the desired frequency band.

times until the desired frequency band is displayed.

13 times. 3 different frequencies on each frequency band can be selected with the band key. (See previous page Using the band stacking registers.)

-

ing mode.

AM FM/DV

: 1 kHz (Z is displayed)

: 10 kHz (Z is displayed) w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired frequency.

Band keys

[MAIN DIAL]

is displayed, If the Dial Lock function is ON, and [MAIN DIAL] does not function. In this case, hold down [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec-

ond to turn OFF the lock function. (p. 77) When LOCK/SPEECH is selected in the

[SPEECH/LOCK] SW item of the Set mode, push-

ing [SPEECH/LOCK] turns OFF the lock function.

(see p. 164 for details) D The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency entry, as described below. Keypad q Push [F-INP ENT] to enter frequencies with the keypad.

w Push the numeric keys to input the desired fre-

quency.

1 MHz digits and 100 kHz digits. e Push [F-INP ENT] to set the input frequency.

[F-INP ENT]. NOTE: The frequency band, selected in either the MAIN or SUB Band, cannot be selected on the other Band. 37

[EXAMPLE]

D The operating frequency can be changed in 1 kHz or 1 MHz steps for quick tuning. Select the desired tuning step in each operating fre-

quency band and mode. q Push [TS] to select the 1 kHz or 1 MHz Quick Tun-

ing function step, or turn it OFF.

Z, is displayed above the 1 kHz or 1 MHz digit, the frequency will be changed in 1 kHz or 1 MHz steps.

in 10 Hz steps. w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to change the frequency in the

selected steps. NOTE:

again. (Z disappears)

-

quency will be changed in 10 Hz steps. D When the 1 kHz quick tuning is selected, the frequency can be changed in the selected kHz steps. The MAIN and SUB Bands use the common kHz tun-

q Push [TS] to turn ON the Quick Tuning function.

w Hold down [TS] for 1 second to display the TS

Z appears. screen to select the quick tuning step. e Select the desired operating mode. r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired kHz step.

selectable.

-

ting, if desired. t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps

for other modes. y Push [TS] to exit the TS screen. NOTE: To display the TS screen, the Quick Tuning function must be turned ON rst. BASIC OPERATION 3

[TS]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears

[F-3]

[TS]

Mode selection

[MAIN DIAL]

3 38 3 BASIC OPERATION

Frequency setting (Continued) D

tuning. q Push [TS] to turn OFF the Quick Tuning function. w Hold down [TS] for 1 second to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON or OFF. NOTE:

TX are used, they also tune in 1 Hz tuning steps.

[UP]/[DN] switches of the microphone are used for frequency tuning (if the quick tuning function is not selected.) D When you rotate [MAIN DIAL] rapidly, the tuning speed can automatically accelerate, depending on the MAIN DIAL Auto TS option in the Set mode. q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select MAIN DIAL mode. Auto TS.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the HIGH or LOW tuning speed acceleration, or to turn OFF the func-

tion.

smaller steps, the tuning speed is approxi-

mately ve times faster. When the tuning step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps, the tuning speed is approxi-

mately two times faster.

(default)

-

fault value. r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode. D 14

The dial speed is reduced to 14 of the normal speed when the 14 tuning function is ON, for ner tuning con-

trol.

14 tuning function in each operating mode. This function is selectable only when the quick tuning function is turned OFF. q Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (menu 1). w Push [14](F-3) to turn the 14 tuning function ON or appears when the 14 tuning function is ON. OFF.

39

[TS]

[MAIN DIAL]

1 Hz step indication

[] []

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET M A I N D I A L A u t o T S 44 H I G H HIGH (default)

[14]

[MENU]

Appears BASIC OPERATION 3 D Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed on 5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the follow-

ing:

USB Data and CW modes

100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)

It is your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-

mission in this frequency band meets the stringent conditions under which amateur operations may use these frequencies. NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-

quencies, modes and lter settings into memory channels, for easy recall. To assist you in operating within the rules specied by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequen-

cies other than the ve shown in the tables below.

The FCC species center frequencies on the 5 MHz frequency band. However, the transceiver displays carrier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to 1.5 kHz below the specied FCC channel center fre-

quency.

5.33050 MHz 5.34650 MHz 5.35700 MHz 5.37150 MHz 5.40350 MHz

5.33200 MHz 5.34800 MHz 5.35850 MHz 5.37300 MHz 5.40500 MHz 3

The transceiver displays the center frequency. There-

fore, tune the transceiver to the specied FCC channel frequency when you operate in these modes.

5.33200 MHz 5.34800 MHz 5.35850 MHz 5.37300 MHz 5.40500 MHz

5.33200 MHz 5.34800 MHz 5.35850 MHz 5.37300 MHz 5.40500 MHz 40 3 BASIC OPERATION

Frequency setting (Continued) D

of an amateur bands frequency range. A regular beep sounds when you tune into a range, and an lower tone error beep sounds when you tune out of a range. q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. Beep. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select Band Edge e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired band edge warning beep setting.

the default amateur bands fre-

quency range, a beep sounds.

(default)

a user programmed amateur bands frequency range, a beep sounds.

a user programmed amateur bands frequency range, a beep sounds. Also transmission is in-

hibited outside the programmed range.

-

fault value. r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode.

The beep output level can be set in the Beep Level item of the Set mode. (p. 161)

the Band Edge Beep item, a total of 30 band edge frequencies can be programmed in the User Band Edge item. See the next page for details. If OFF or ON (Default) is selected, the User Band Edge item does not appear in the Set mode. 41

[] []

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET B a n d E d g e B e e p 6 O N ( D e f a u l t ) ON (Default) SET B a n d E d g e B e e p 6 O N ( U s e r ) ON (User) selection Push SET U s e r B a n d E d g e 7 D E F E D T

[User Band Edge] item D

the Band Edge Beep item, the User Band Edge item appears in the Set mode. A total of 30 band edge frequencies can be pro-

grammed in the User Band Edge item. NOTE:

should delete or change them to add the desired band edge frequency.

frequency must be higher than the preceding fre-

quency.

-

teur band, cannot be programmed. q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. Beep. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select Band Edge e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select either ON (User) or

r Push [Z](F-2) to select User Band Edge. t Push [EDT](F-4) to display the EDG screen (band edge program). y Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired band edge.

Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) continuously selects the band edges.

](F-3) to select the upper or lower band edge frequency entry status.

-

lected band edge.

u Input the desired frequency with the keypad, then push [F-INP ENT].

to input decimal point (.) between the MHz and kHz digits.

i Push [MENU] to save. o Push [MENU] again to exit the Set mode.

If you want to reset the band edge frequencies to their default (initial) value, select the User Band Edge item, then hold down [DEF](F-3) for 1 second. The band edge initialize screen appears, then hold

frequency settings to their default values. BASIC OPERATION 3

[]

[]

[]

Keypad

[MENU]

[] [DEL]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET B a n d E d g e B e e p 6 O N ( U s e r ) ON (User) setting in the Band Edge Beep item Push 3 SET U s e r B a n d E d g e 7 D E F E D T User Band Edge item Push EDG

1 1.800.000-

1.999.999

I N S D E L EDG screen SET U s e r B a n d E d g e 7 D E F E D T User Band Edge item Hold down SET I n i t i a l i z e E d g e s ?

N O Y E S Band edge initialize screen Hold down SET U s e r B a n d E d g e 7 D E F E D T 42 3 BASIC OPERATION

The usable operating modes in the IC-9100 are listed to the right.

-

ing the mode switch. See the diagram to the right for the order of selection.

data mode is selected, depending on the DATA MOD option in the Set mode (p. 167).

[CW/RTTY]

[AM/FM]

USB LSB CW

AM FM USB Data LSB Data CW Reverse

AM Data FM Data DV

Push [SSB] to select the USB or LSB mode.

when operating below 10 MHz, LSB is selected rst.

1 second to select the data mode. (D appears)

SSB mode.

for 1 second to toggle between normal and reverse modes.

Push [AM/FM] to select the AM or FM mode.

1 second to select the data mode. (D appears)

the normal AM or FM mode. NOTE:

HF/50MHz frequency bands.

MHz frequency band.

-

tion) allows you to exchange the text message and call sign, and transmit a position data with a third-party GPS receiver.

appears. Repeater) mode operation ON or OFF.

DV and

mode is ON.

-

peater list to operate a D-STAR repeater simply.

43 Mode switches USB USB LSB LSB CW-R CW RTTY RTTY-R FM FM DR AM AM DV

: Push momentary

: Hold down for 1 second INFORMATION!

The DV mode can be selected in either MAIN or SUB band. If you select the DV mode in both Bands, the transceiver cannot receive on the SUB Band. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. BASIC OPERATION 3

Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level. The squelch removes noise output to the speaker when no signal is received (closed squelch).

also be used in other modes.

the most effective use of the [RF/SQL] control.

Squelch is xed open) or only a squelch control (RF gain is xed at maximum sensitivity) depending on the RF/SQL Control option in the Set mode. (p. 162)

[RF/SQL](MAIN Band)

[RF/SQL](SUB Band) SET MODE SETTING OPERATING MODE

[RF/SQL]

OPERATION RF+SQL

(default) FM/DV

AM SQL ALL AUTO

AM/FM/DV Operates as an RF gain control, and a noise squelch or Smeter squelch. Operates as an RF gain control, and an Smeter squelch. Operates as only a squelch control.

maximum sensitivity. Operates as only an RF gain control.

Operates as only a squelch control.

maximum sensitivity.

(Receive sensitivity) Normally, [RF/SQL] is set to the 12 oclock position. Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 oclock position for maxi-

mum sensitivity.

-

duces sensitivity.

While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.

(Removing non-signal noise) Rotate [RF/SQL] clockwise when no signal is received, until the noise just disappears.

S-meter squelch this allows you to set a minimum signal level needed to open the squelch.

Noise squelch (FM/DV modes) Recommended level Squelch is open. RF gain adjustable range Maximum RF gain S-meter squelch

Adjustable range Minimum RF gain Maximum RF gain

(RF gain is xed at maximum.) Noise squelch (FM/DV modes) Noise squelch threshold

(FM mode) Squelch is open. S-meter squelch threshold S-meter squelch Shallow Deep 3 44 3 BASIC OPERATION

Rotate the [AF] control clockwise to increase the audio output level, counterclockwise to decrease it. Increases Decreases

The IC-9100 has a built-in voice synthesizer to an-

nounce the operating frequency, mode and S-meter level in clear, electronically-generated voice, in English

(or Japanese). First, select the desired parameters to be announced in the Set mode. (p. 164)

(See NOTE as described below.)

Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently selected frequency, mode and S-meter level*.

* The S-meter level announcement can be turned OFF. (p. 164) NOTE: If SPEECH/LOCK is not selected in the

[SPEECH/LOCK] SW item of the Set mode, you should hold down [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 second to activate the voice synthesizer. (p. 164)

Push a mode switch to announce the appropriate mode, when the SPEECH [MODE] SW item is set to ON in the Set mode. (p. 164)

The transmit meter can be toggled between three functions for your convenience. The RF power meter is always displayed.

transmit meter function between SWR, ALC and COMP.

-

quency.

Displays the ALC level. When the meter move-

ment shows the input signal level exceeds the allowable level, the ALC limits the RF power. In such cases, decrease the microphone gain level.

speech compressor is in use.

45

[AF](MAIN Band)

[AF](SUB Band) Mode switches

[SPEECH/LOCK]

]

When ALC meter is selected. RF output power is

-

cent), and it becomes the S-meter in receive.

-

-

-

D CAUTION: Transmitting without an antenna may damage the transceiver. In the AM mode, you can transmit on only the HF/50MHz frequency bands. q Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

-

cator lights red. (p. 156) w Release [PTT] again to receive. (or push [TRANS-

MIT])

Adjusting the transmit output power

Rotate [RF POWER]. Decreases Increases

HF/50 MHz 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz

2 to 100 W (AM: 2 to 30 W) 2 to 100 W 2 to 75 W 1 to 10 W D

q Push [PTT] to transmit.

w

ALC meter. And then, while speaking into the mi-

crophone, rotate [MIC GAIN] so that the ALC meter reading stays within the ALC zone.

While speaking into the microphone, rotate

[MIC GAIN] with another station listening to your voice for clarity.

Recommended level for Icom microphones Decreases Increases e Release [PTT] to receive. BASIC OPERATION 3

[TRANSMIT]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[RF POWER]

SUB Band TX/RX indicator NOTE: When you transmit on the HF/50 MHz fre-

quency bands, while monitoring an out of the ama-

teur band frequency on VHF or UHF on the SUB band, the squelch on the SUB Band closes. There-

fore, you cannot receive on the VHF or UHF fre-

quency.

]

]

ALC zone 3 46 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [SSB] to select the LSB or USB mode.

when operating below 10 MHz, LSB is selected rst.

second to select the data mode, if needed. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

The tuning step can be changed using the tuning step program mode. (p. 38) r Rotate [AF] (MAIN Band) to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level.

step, if necessary. u Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

[TRANSMIT] TX/RX indicator (MAIN Band)

[AF]

[MIC GAIN]

[SSB]

[MAIN DIAL]

(MAIN Band) LSB or USB appears

47

q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w

for 1 second to toggle between CW and CW-R modes, if necessary. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

The tuning step can be changed using the tuning step program mode. (p. 38) r Rotate [AF] (MAIN Band) to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push [TRANSMIT] to transmit.

y Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

[TRANSMIT] TX/RX indicator (MAIN Band)

[AF]

[CW/RTTY]

[MAIN DIAL]

(MAIN Band) CW or CW-R appears signals.

The Po meter indicates transmitted CW output power.

u

i Push [TRANSMIT] to receive.

function (p. 39)

4 48 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Operating CW (Continued) D About the CW reverse mode The CW reverse mode receives signals with a reverse side CW carrier point similar to voice LSB and USB modes. Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal and you want to reduce the interfering tone. q once or twice to select the CW mode. w-

tween CW and CW-R mode, if necessary.

Hold down Interference BFO Desired signal BFO Interference Desired signal CW mode (LSB side) CW-R mode (USB side) D The received CW audio pitch and CW sidetone can be adjusted to suit your preference without changing the operating frequency.

Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.

D The transceivers internal electronic keyer speed can be adjusted to between 6 and 48 wpm (words per min-

ute).

D When the transceiver is in the receive mode (and the Break-in function is OFF p. 79), you can listen to the CW sidetone without actually transmitting.

sending, but be sure to turn OFF the Break-in func-

tion. The CW sidetone level can be adjusted in the Side Tone Level item of the Keyer Set mode (p. 54).

[CW PITCH]

[KEY SPEED]

49 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

of the built-in electronic keyer in the memory keyer menu. q In the CW mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w-

ory Keyer). e Push [SEND](F-2), [EDT](F-3), [001](F-4) or [SET]

(F-5) to select the desired menu. See the diagram below.

D

[SEND]

[SEND]

[EDT]

[SET]

[MENU]

[KEY]/[001]

The screen you want to appear rst can be

the Set mode. (p. 165) 4 M1 AGC D U P 1 4 KEY S C P Push

(p. 51) SEND M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 001 1

KEY S E N D E D T 0 0 1 S E T

[F-2]

[F-3]

[F-4]

[F-5]

(p. 52) EDT CQ TEST CQ TEST DE D E L S P C M 1

(p. 53) 001 Number Style

1 N o r m a l

(p. 54) SET Side Tone Level

1 5 0 %

50 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Electronic keyer functions (Continued) D Pre-set characters can be sent using the Keyer Send menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set in the Edit menu.

q In the CW mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w-

ory Keyer). e Push [SEND](F-2) to display the SEND screen

(Keyer Send). r Push [TRANSMIT] to switch the transceiver to transmit, or turn ON the Break-in function. (p. 79) t Push one of the function keys, [M1](F-1) to

[M4](F-4), to send the memory keyer contents.

transmission.

contents are sent.

by 1 before sending the memory keyer contents to a station a second time.

60 seconds (1 second steps) in the Keyer Repeat Time item of the Keyer Set mode. (p. 54) y-

ory Keyer). u Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1). For your information When an external keypad is connected to pin 3 and pin 7 of the [MIC] connector, the contents of M1 to M4 can be transmitted without selecting the keyer send menu. See page 167 for details. SEND M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 001 1

SEND M 1 CQ TEST CQ TE M 4 M 2 M 3 001 1

Counter SEND M 1 M 2 UR 5NN001 BK 001 M 3 1 Count up trigger icon M 4

SEND CFM TU M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 001 1

SEND M 1 QRZ?

M 2 M 3 M 4 001 1

CQ TEST CQ TE M 4 M 2 M 3 001 1

[ and ] appear SEND M 1]

[

51 D The contents of the memory keyer memories can be set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes for often-used CW sentences, contest numbers or a count up trigger. The total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 characters per memory channel.

q In the CW mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w-

ory Keyer). e Push [EDT](F-3) to display the EDT screen (Keyer Edit).

-

played. r Push [F-1] one or more times to select the memory keyer channel to be edited. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired character

or symbol. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

characters, an error beep sounds. In this case, push []

(F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL]

(F-4) to delete it.

A to Z, ? ^ . , @ y Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backwards, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forwards. u Repeat steps t and y to program up to 70 char-

acters memory keyer contents. i screen (Memory Keyer). o Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1). NOTE:

^ is used to transmit a string of characters with no inter-character space. Put ^ before a text string such as ^AR, and the string AR is sent with no space.

is used to insert the CW contest number. The number automatically advances by 1. This function is available for only one memory keyer channel at a time. is used in memory keyer channel M2 by default. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 EDT CQ TEST CQ TEST DE D E L S P C M 1

Input a space Delete a character Move the cursor forwards Move the cursor backwards Select M1 to M4 4

EDT UR 5NNM BK M 2

D E L S P C When inputting an asterisk, the counter is incremented by 1.

EDT CFM TU M 3

D E L S P C

EDT QRZ?

M 4

D E L S P C

Inputting QSL TU

channel 3 (M3). EDT QSL TU DE JA3YUA M 3 D E L S P C

EDT TU DE JA3YUA TEST M 3 D E L S P C

M1 M2 M3 M4 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE JA1 JA1 TEST UR 5NN BK CFM TU QRZ?

52 001 Number Style

1 N o r m a l Select the item Reset to the default setting 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Electronic keyer functions (Continued) D This mode is used to set the contest number, count up trigger and Present number.

q In the CW mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w-

ory Keyer). e Push [001](F-4) to enter the Contest Number Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. y screen (Memory Keyer). u Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1).

1.

This item sets the numbering system used for contest numbers normal or short morse numbers. Short morse numbers are also referred to as cut numbers.

ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.

ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.

NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.

NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

2.

Set the count-up trigger to one of four memory slots for the contest number exchange. The count-up trigger allows the contest number to automatically advance after each complete number exchange is sent.

3.

This item shows the current number for the count-up trigger channel set above.

down [CLR](F-3) for 1 second to reset the current number to 001. 53 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D Keyer Set mode This Set mode is used to set the CW sidetone, mem-

ory keyer repeat time, dash weight, paddle specica-

tions, keyer type, etc.

q In the CW mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w-

ory Keyer). e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the Keyer Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. y screen (Memory Keyer). u Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1). SET Side Tone Level

1 5 0 %

Select the item Reset to the default setting 4

1. Select the CW sidetone output level.

5.

Set the dot/dash ratio.

2.

Set the CW sidetone level limit. When the [AF] con-

trol is rotated above a specied level, the CW sidetone does not increase.

Keyer

3.

When sending CW using the repeat timer, set the time between transmission.

4.

When you are in the SEND screen (Keyer Send), channel numbers are displayed above the function keys. However, you can display the rst three char-

acters of the keyer message instead of the channel number. Select whether to display the channel number or the rst three characters of the keyer.

keyer message.

Morse code K DOT (fixed*) DASH DASH Weight setting:

1:1:3 (default) Weight setting:

Adjusted Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)

*SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted with only [KEY SPEED].

6. Set the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.

Key action Tx Rx Tx output power Set Tx power level 0 Rise time Time Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated if the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.

Continued on the next page. 54 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Electronic keyer functions D Keyer Set mode (continued) 7.

Set the paddle polarity.

8.

the front panel.

-

lected.

9.

Set the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches to be used as a key. (The microphone [UP]/[DN] switches do not work as a squeeze key.)

for CW.

key for CW. NOTE: When ON is selected, the frequency and memory channels cannot be changed using the

[UP]/[DN] switches. 55 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

manual that comes with the equipment. q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w once or twice mode.

for 1 second to toggle between normal and reverse modes, if needed.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

-

w.

The tuning step can be changed using the tuning step program mode. (p. 38) r Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transceiver to the transmit mode, or transmit a SEND signal from your TNC.

strength. t Use your connected PC or TNC (TU) to transmit

y Push [TRANSMIT] to receive.

function (p. 39)

[TRANSMIT]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[CW/RTTY]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C D U P 1 / 4 R T T Y S C P While receiving, the meter functions as the

easier. Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to the point where both sides of the dots appear equally.

the transmit meter, SWR, ALC or COMP,

4 56 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

q once or twice mode.

for 1 second to toggle between normal and reverse modes, if needed.

w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). e r Push [DEC](F-2), [TPF](F-4) or [SET](F-5) to select the desired menu. See the diagram below.

D

[DEC]

[RTTY]/[TPF]

[SET]

[MENU]

[CW/RTTY]

M1 AGC D U P 1 / 4 RTTY S C P Push

RTTY D E C T P F S E T

(p. 59) DEC 45BPS BAUDOT A D J MK SFT 2125 170 F2 : HOLD F3 : CLR

(p. 58) RTTY RTTYTPF ON D E C T P F S E T

(p. 60) SET RTTY Mark Freq

1 2 1 2 5

[F-2]

[F-4]

[F-5]

57 D About RTTY reverse mode Received characters are occasionally garbled when the Mark and Space signals are reversed. This rever-

sal can be caused by incorrect TNC connections, set-

ting or commands.

-

-

lected.

normal mode. D The Twin Peak Filter changes the receive frequency response by boosting 2125 and 2295 Hz for better

q screen (Menu 1). w e Push [TPF](F-4) to turn the Twin Peak Filter ON or OFF. r Push [MENU] to return to the previous display. NOTE: When the Twin Peak Filter is in use, the re-

not a malfunction. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Normal Reverse 170 Hz 2125 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark RTTY D E C T P F S E T Push RTTY RTTYTPF ON D E C T P F S E T Appears when the Twin Peak lter is turned ON. 4 58 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D RTTY decoder

(mark freq.: 2125 Hz, shift freq.: 170 Hz, 45 bps). An external terminal unit (TU) or terminal node con-

nector (TNC) is not necessary for receiving a Baudot signal. q screen (Menu 1). w e

r Push [F-2] to turn ON the Hold function to hold the

current screen.

H appears when this function is turned ON.

t Hold down [F-3] for 1 second to clear the displayed

characters.

H disappears at the same time as the displayed char-

acters are cleared. (The hold function is cancelled.) y Push [MENU] to return to the previous display.

If some characters are displayed when no signal is re-

q above. w Push [F-1](ADJ) to select the threshold level adjust-

ment mode. e threshold level.

-

ting, if desired. r Push [MENU] to return to the previous display. The number of the decoder display lines, the Un-

Shift On Space (USOS) function and new line code

59 M1 AGC RTTY D U P 1 / 4 RTTY S C P Push D E C T P F S E T Push DEC 45BPS BAUDOT A D J MK SFT 2125 170 F2 : HOLD F3 : CLR Appears when the Hold function is turned ON. DEC 45BPS BAUDOT A D J MK SFT 2125 170 F2 : HOLD F3 : CLR Push DEC 45BPS BAUDOT

9 MK SFT 2125 170 F2 : HOLD F3 : CLR Threshold level display RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D RTTY Set mode

frequencies, keying type, decode USOS function,

-

code screen display lines.

q ush [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w e r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. y screen. u Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1). SET RTTY Mark Freq

1 2 1 2 5 Select the item Reset to the default setting 4

1.

Decode USOS 4.

Turn the USOS (UnShift On Space) function ON or OFF. This function decodes a letter code after receiv-

ing a space.

2.

3. Select normal or reverse keying polarity.

5.

CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed

CR+LF code.

6. Set the decoder screen display mode to 2 or 3 lines.

60 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [AM/FM] to select the AM or FM mode.

second to select the data mode, if needed. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

The tuning step can be changed in the tuning step pro-

gram mode. (p. 38) r Rotate [AF] (MAIN Band) to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level.

step, if necessary. u Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again) NOTE:

HF/50MHz frequency bands.

MHz frequency band.

[TRANSMIT] TX/RX indicator (MAIN Band)

[AF]

[MIC GAIN] [AM/FM]

[MAIN DIAL]

(MAIN Band)

AM mode Appears

FM mode Appears

*AM only

61

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a sig-

silently wait for calls from others using the same tone. q Push [AM/FM] once or twice to select the FM mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). e Push [TON](F-4) one or more times to turn ON the Tone squelch function.

r Hold down [TON](F-4) for 1 second to display the TON screen.

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired tone squelch frequency. (See the table shown below.)

-

ting, if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and exit the TON screen. u Communicate in the usual manner. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

[F-3]

[MENU]

[AM/FM]

[TON](F-4)

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P 4

186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5

(Unit: Hz) Hold down 254.1 TON T O N T S Q L T o n e S C A N 8 8 . 5 H z 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 62 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

The DTCS function is another method of communica-

tions using selective calling. Only received signals hav-

ing a matching 3-digit code will open the squelch. q Push [AM/FM] once or twice to select the FM mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). e Push [TON](F-4) one or more times to turn ON the DTCS function.

r Hold down [TON](F-4) for 1 second to display the TON screen.

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired DTCS code number, and push [F-5] to select the desired code polarity. NN NR RN RR

: Normal polarity is used for both transmit and receive.

: Normal polarity is used for transmit, reversed polarity is used for receive.

: Reversed polarity is used for transmit, normal polarity is used for receive.

: Reversed polarity is used for both transmit and receive.

-

ting, if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and exit the TON screen. u Communicate in the usual manner.

[F-3]

[TON](F-4)

[MENU]

[AM/FM]

[F-5]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down TON T O N D T C S C o d e S C A N 0 2 3 N N DTCS Code DTCS code polarity

244 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 274 306 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 072 073 074 114 115 116 122 125 131 132 134 143 145 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053 054 065 071 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624 627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 63 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

To search for a repeaters sub-audible tone frequency, a tone scan is available. By monitoring a repeater signal with a tone squelch or DTCS, you can determine the tone frequency neces-

sary to open the repeater or the squelch.

[TON] [SCAN]

q In the FM mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w Hold down [TON](F-4) for 1 second to enter the TON screen. e Push [TON](F-1) one or more times to select the tone type to be scanned.

squelch or DTCS Code for a DTCS code can be se-

lected.

-

sired polarity by pushing [F-5]. NN : Normal polarity for both transmit and receive. NR : Normal polarity for transmit and reverse polarity for receive. RN : Reverse polarity for transmit and normal polarity

for receive. RR : Reverse polarity for both transmit and receive. r Push [SCAN](F-2) to start the Tone scan.

SCAN blinks, depending on the type you selected.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147) t When a matched tone or code is found, the scan pauses, and the detected sub-audible tone fre-

quency or DTCS code is set.

-

ting, if desired. y Push [SCAN](F-2) to cancel the Tone scan. When the tone scan or DTCS code scan is used in the Memory or Call channel mode, the detected tone frequency or code can be used temporarily. To save the detected tone frequency or code set-

ting, you must over-write the Memory or Call chan-

nel data. (pp. 140, 141)

[MENU]

[F3]

[F-5]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P TON T O N R p t r T o n e S C A N Hold down 8 8 . 5 H z Push to select the tone type. TON T S Q L Tone T O N SCAN 8 8 . 5 H z Push to start or cancel the scan. TON T S Q L Tone SACN SCAN

. H z 4 64 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 A repeater receives transmitted signals and re-trans-

mits them on a different frequency. When using a re-

peater, the transmit frequency is shifted from the re-

ceive frequency by a frequency offset. A repeater can be accessed using the duplex opera-

tion to set the frequency shift to the same value as the repeaters frequency offset. See page 94 for details on accessing a D-STAR repeater. q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [A/B] to select VFO A. r Push [AM/FM] to select the FM mode. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the receive frequency

(repeater output frequency). When the auto repeater function is turned ON (avail-

able in only the U.S.A. and Korea versions), steps y and u are not necessary. (p. 67) y Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then push [DUP](F-2) one or more times to set the offset direction.

-

pears on the function dislay.

the DUP Offset item of the Set mode. (p. 163)

u Push [TON](F-4) to turn ON the repeater tone.

the TON screen. 88.5 Hz is set by default. (p. 62) NOTE: To transmit a 1750 Hz European repeater tone, hold down [TON](F-4) while transmitting. u Communicate in the normal way. D Some repeaters require a subaudible tone to be ac-

cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your

tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz. q In the FM mode, push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). w Push [TON](F-4) one or more times to turn ON the tone encoder function.

e Hold down [TON](F-4) for 1 second to display the TON screen.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired repeater tone frequency. (See the table to the right.) t Push [MENU] to save, and exit the TON screen. 65

[DUP]

[TON]

[A/B]

[AM/FM]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears Appears M1 A G C 1 4 5 . 9 2 0 0 0 D U P A F C T O N S C P Appears TON T O N R p t r T o n e S C A N 8 8 . 5 H z

67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5

(unit: Hz) 254.1 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 D This function allows you to set the repeater operation by holding down one switch. First, set the frequency offset as well as the repeater access tone frequency (p. 163). q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w In the FM mode, push [A/B] to select VFO A. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired receive fre-

quency (repeater output frequency). r Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). t Hold down [DUP](F-2) for 1 second to turn ON the One-touch repeater function.

the function display.

OFF, if it is ON. y Push [DUP](F-2) once or twice to switch the offset direction.

u Communicate in the normal way. D

transmitted signal without having to go through a re-

peater. This function helps you to check whether the direct communication can be done, or not.

While receiving, hold down [XFC] to see if you can directly receive the other partys transmitted signal.

-

quency offset are displayed on the function display.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down Appears Appears M1 A G C 1 4 5 . 9 2 0 0 0 D U P A F C T O N S C P Transmit (repeater receive) frequency appears

[XFC]

M1 A G C 1 4 5 . 9 2 0 0 0 D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P 6 0 0 . 0 k Frequency Offset direction and value. 4 66 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Repeater operation (Continued) D

The transceiver has three Auto Repeater ranges that can be used for each frequency band. And you can set the desired Auto Repeater ranges by programming the lower and higher edge frequencies into the allowable Memory channel of each band as described below. q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [AM/FM] once or twice to select the FM mode. e Set the desired lower edge frequency. r Turn ON the duplex operation, then select the du-

plex direction. (pp. 65, 163)

are available. t Rotate [M-CH] to select a Memory channel of the

selected frequency band.

If the HF band is selected in step q, and you want to set Range 1, select Memory channel 1 for the lower edge frequency programming. y Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the data into the Memory channel.

memory programming is com-

plete. u Set the upper edge frequency. i Rotate [M-CH] to select the opposite Memory chan-

nel.

-

lected in step t. o Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the data into the selected Memory channel.

memory programming is com-

plete.

!0 Repeat steps q to o to program other ranges. NOTE: We recommend that all repeater ranges are programmed into the Memory channel of each band. The previously programmed ranges will be lost.

!1 Hold down [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 second to turn ON the Dial Lock function.

appears.

!2 Hold down [POWER] for 1 second to turn OFF the power.

!3 While holding down [AM/FM] and [F-INP ENT],

push [POWER] to turn ON the power.

Auto Rptr Set appears.

after programming.

!4 Hold down [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 second to turn OFF the Dial Lock function.

disappears.

67

[POWER]

[AM/FM]

[BAND](MAIN/SUB)

[F-INP ENT]

[SPEECH/LOCK]

[MW]

[M-CH]

51.620000 51.999999 52.500000 52.999999 53.500000 53.999999 145.200000 145.999999 146.610000 146.999999 147.000000 147.399999 442.000000 444.999999 447.000000 449.999999 1282.000000 1295.000000 DUP DUP DUP+

DUP+

DUP DUP

439.000000 440.000000 1290.000000 1293.000000 DUP DUP

-

Memory CH 1 Memory CH 3 Memory CH 5 Memory CH 2 Memory CH 4 Memory CH 6

Memory CH 7 Memory CH 9 Memory CH 11 Memory CH 8 Memory CH 10 Memory CH 12 NOTE: Auto Repeater ranges must be programmed into the Memory channel of EACH band. The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. D

When the operating frequency falls within the repeater output frequency range, the Auto Repeater function automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex ON/

OFF, duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF). q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select Auto Re-

peater. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the Auto Repeater function.

r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode.

D q Turn OFF the Auto Repeater function in the Set mode. (p. 163) w Push [A/B] to select VFO A. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the repeater output fre-

quency. r Push [A/B] to select VFO B. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the repeater input fre-

quency. y Push [A/B] to select VFO A. u Push [SPLIT] to turn ON the Split function. i Push [TON](F-4) to turn ON the previously set tone encoder. o Rotate [M-CH] to select the desired memory chan-

nel.

!0 Hold down [MW] for 1 second to store the set con-

tents into the selected memory channel. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4

[] []

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET A u t o R e p e a t e r 20 O N 1 ON1 (default for the U.S.A. version)

[A/B]

[SPLIT]

[MW]

[TON]

[MAIN DIAL]

[M-CH]

4 68 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

(Mode: FM/DV AFC stands for Automatic Frequency Control. The AFC function tunes the displayed frequency automatically when an off-center frequency is received. q Push [AM/FM] or once or twice to select the FM or DV mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). e Push [AFC](F-3) to turn ON the AFC function.

appears when the AFC function is ON.

The AFC limit can be set in the Set mode. (p. 164) While the AFC limit is ON, AFC stops tuning when the received frequency exits the frequency limit range. The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation.

The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-

pensates for off-frequency operation of the received station. The function shifts the receive frequency up to 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps*, without changing the trans-

mit frequency.

* The [RIT/TX] control tunes in 1 Hz steps when the op-

erating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step readout. However, the 1 Hz digit is not displayed on the frequency shift readout. q Push [RIT] to turn ON the RIT function.

[AFC]

[MENU]

[AM/FM]

[D

[RIT]

[CLEAR]

[RIT/TX] control Appear is ON. w Rotate the [RIT/TX] control.

-

quency.

when the quick RIT clear function is ON. (p. 164)

to the operating frequency. e To cancel the RIT function, push [RIT] again.

D When the RIT function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-

lows you to listen to the displayed frequency (RIT is temporarily cancelled). M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P

[XFC]

69

The Band Scope function allows you to visually check the location and strength of signals around a specied frequency. The IC-9100s Band Scope function can be used in any operating mode and any frequency band. FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 Blinks when the reference frequency is outside of the sweep range. SCP S T E P 0 . 5 k Sweep icon Band scope display Frequency display mark Sweep step display INDICATOR

While the band scope is sweeping, DESCRIPTION

is displayed.

Displays the signal location and strength in relation to the center (displayed) frequency. Signal strength is relative to the S-meter level, S1 to S9, with each vertical dot in the band scope indicator equal to one seg-

ment of the S-meter. Signal activity is measured 30 steps from the center frequency, with each step equal to the selected sweep step. After a sweep, displays the relative position of the reference frequency. When the reference frequency is outside of the sweep range, or blinks. After changing the frequency, hold down [F-3] for 1 second to automatically return to the center frequency. Displays the selected sweep step. 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable. Each dot of the band scope display is approximately equal to the selected sweep step.

The band scope measures receive signal location and strength over a specied range on either side of a selected frequency, in either the VFO or memory modes. q Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a frequency. w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then push [SCP](F-5) to display the SCP screen

(Band Scope).

-

lected sweeping step.

e Push [F-5] one or more times to select the desired sweep step.

0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable.

r Push [F-1] to start sweeping, then automatically

stop after sweeping.

-

ing. In this case, push [F-1] again to stop the sweeping. is displayed and received signals

cannot be heard.

to reduce the signal input level, and turn ON the Attenu-

ator to improve the readability of the band scope. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to nd a signal that you wish to communicate with. If you nd the signal, communi-

cate in the normal way.

before rotating [MAIN DIAL], hold down [F-3] for 1 sec-

ond.

range, or blinks. y If you want to update the band conditions while re-

ceiving, repeat steps e and r. SCP S T E P 0 . 5 k Sweep start/stop Sweep step selection SCP Sweep icon S T E P 0 . 5 k NOTE:

If you select a large sweep step, a wide frequency range can be displayed on the band scope, but some signals may be skipped and not displayed. 5 70 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

The preamplier amplies weak signals in the receiver front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Turn this function ON when receiving weak signals. The AG-25, AG-35 or AG-1200*1 pre-amplier unit is required for 144, 430 or 1200 MHz*2 frequency band.

band in the Set mode. (pp. 165, 166)

-

amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

or P. AMP is displayed when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON.

P. AMP P. AMP Wide dynamic range preamplier. It is most effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands. High-gain preamplier. It is most effective for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.

*2

pre-amplier unit ON or OFF, if installed.

OFF.

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being distorted when very strong signals are near the signals frequency, or when very strong electromagnetic elds, such as from broadcast stations are near your location. These can both be independently set for each band.

Hold down [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 second to turn ON the Attenuator.

[PTT]

About the P.AMP2 preamplier The preamp 2 is a high gain receive amplier. When it is used in the presence of strong electromagnetic elds, distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use either the P.AMP 1 or P.AMP OFF setting. Preamp 2 is most effective when:

weak.

antennas, or while using a narrow band antenna.

(such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a short

*1 AG-1200 has been discontinued, but it can be still be used.

*2 The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation.

[PTT]

ON.

Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn it OFF.

The Preamplier and Attenuator are switched with [P.AMP/ATT], as shown below.

P.AMP OFF P.AMP P.AMP Push

P.AMP OFF Push P.AMP ON Hold down Push Hold down Push ATT ON ATT ON 71 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5

The AGC (Auto Gain Control) controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio output level, even when the received signal strength varies greatly. The transceiver has 3 pre-set AGC time constants: fast,

In the FM and DV modes, the AGC time constant is xed as FAST (0.1 second). D q

(p. 43) w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then push [AGC](F-1) one or more times to select AGC fast (

) or AGC slow (

), AGC mid (

). AGC OFF appears when the selected AGC speeds time constant is set to OFF.

[MENU] [AGC]

D q

(p. 43) w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then hold down [AGC](F-1) for 1 second to display the AGC screen. e Push either [FAST](F-2), [MID](F-3) or [SLOW](F-4) to select the desired AGC speed to be set.

An underline appears below the time constant display.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired time con-

stant.

seconds (depending on the mode) or turned OFF.

, [MID](F-3) or [SLOW](F-4) for 1 second to reset to the default setting for the selected time constant, if desired. t Select another mode (except for FM and DV), then repeat steps e and r, if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and exit the AGC screen.

(unit: seconds)

SSB Mode

0.3 (FAST) 2.0 (MID) 6.0 (SLOW) 0.1 (FAST) 0.5 (MID) 1.2 (SLOW) 3.0 (FAST) 5.0 (MID) 7.0 (SLOW) FM/DV 0.1 (FAST) AM OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 Fixed 5 72 M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P Hold down

AGC F A S T 0 . 3 s M I D 2 . 0 s S L O W 6 . 0 s S S B Appears under the selected AGC speeds time constant display. Selected mode

AGC F A S T 0 . 3 s M I D 2 . 0 s S L O W 6 . 0 s S S B

AGC F A S T 0 . 3 s M I D 2 . 0 s S L O W 6 . 0 s S S B For your information When you are receiving a weak signal, and a strong signal is momentarily received, the AGC function quickly reduces the receiver gain. When that sig-

nal disappears, the transceiver may not receive the weak signal because of the AGC action. In that case, hold down [AGC](F-1) for 1 second, and ro-

tate [MAIN DIAL] to set the time constant to OFF. 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

The transceiver has 3 passband width IF lters for each mode. The lter selection is automatically memorized in each mode. The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-

rized in each lter. D q Select the desired mode. w Push [FILTER] one or more times to select IF lter

1, 2 or 3.

-

played on the LCD. D

q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second to display the FIL screen (Filter) to set the lter passband width. w

cannot be set. e Push [FILTER] one or more times to select IF lter 1, 2 or 3. r Push [BW](F-1), then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the desired passband width. Then push [BW](F-1) to set it.

also adjusts the passband width. After adjustment, re-

lease [BW](F-1) to set it.

-

ting, if desired. t Repeat steps w to r if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and exit the FIL screen. Mode

SSB SSB-D CW

AM AM-D FM FM-D DV FILTER1 (3.0 kHz) FILTER2 (2.4 kHz) FILTER3 (1.8 kHz) FILTER1 (1.2 kHz) FILTER2 (500 Hz) FILTER3 (250 Hz) FILTER1 (2.4 kHz) FILTER2 (500 Hz) FILTER3 (250 Hz) FILTER1 (9.0 kHz) FILTER2 (6.0 kHz) FILTER3 (3.0 kHz) FILTER1 (15 kHz) FILTER2 (10 kHz) FILTER3 (7.0 kHz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz) 600 to 3600 Hz (100 Hz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz) 600 to 3600 Hz (100 Hz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz) 600 to 2700 Hz (100 Hz) 200 Hz to 10 kHz (200 Hz) Fixed 73

[FILTER]

Filter selection M1 A G C B 2 . 4 K S 0 D U P C O M P T B W S C P The selected lter width is displayed when [FILTER] is pushed.

FIL FIL B W B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K S H A R P Shows the selected lter and passband width.

Blinks Appears FIL B W B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K S H A R P Reverses Push [BW](F-1), then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to ad-

just the passband width. Then push [BW](F-1), The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the passband width is changed. This FIL screen (Filter) graphically displays the PBT shift frequencies and passband width. D

The IC-9100 has a 15 kHz lter passband width at the 1st IF frequency. The 1st IF lters reduce interference from strong nearby signals. If the optional FL-430 1ST IF FILTER (6 kHz) is installed, a 6 kHz lter width can be used. Or, if the FL-431 1ST IF FILTER (3 kHz) is installed, a 3 kHz lter width can be used.

HF/50 MHz band frequency. q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second to display the FIL screen (Filter). w

and have no options. e Hold down [F-5] for 1 second to select the desired

lter width from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz.

setting, if desired. (The lter passband width setting is also reset to the default setting.) r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the FIL screen. D

A soft or sharp type of DSP lter shape for both SSB and CW can be independently selected. q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second to display the FIL screen (Filter). w Select the SSB or CW mode. e Push [F-5] once or twice to select either the soft or sharp filter shape. r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the FIL screen (Fil-

ter). FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5

[F-3]

[F-5]

[MENU]

[FILTER]

15 kHz is selected. FIL B W B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K R : 1 5 K S H A R P

[F-5]

[MENU]

[FILTER]

FIL B W FIL B W B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K S H A R P Push B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K S O F T 5 74 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

To reject interference, PBT (Passband Tuning) elec-

tronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF lter passband. The IC-9100 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving both [TWIN-PBT] controls shift the IF passband cen-

ter frequency both above and below the received fre-

quency.

The LCD graphically shows the passband width and frequency shift.

Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second to display the FIL screen (Filter). Current passband width and fre-

quency shift are displayed in the FIL screen.

Hold down [PBT-CLR] for 1 second to set the IF frequency to the center position.

The variable range depends on the passband width and mode. The edge of the variable range is half of the passband width. The PBT is adjustable in 25 Hz steps

mode.

The [TWIN-PBT] controls should normally be set to the center positions when there is no interfer-

ence. The PBT setting should be cleared.

change.

modes.

may occur. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.

Pushing [PBT-CLR] displays the lter passband width and shift value for 1 seconds on the function display.

[PBT-CLR]

[TWIN-PBT]

M1 A G C B 2 . 3 K S + 2 5 D U P C O M P T B W S C P Passband width and shift value are displayed while

[TWIN PBT] is used. Appears when pass-

band is shifted.

FIL B W B 2 . 4 K S 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K R : 1 5 K S H A R P Shows the selected lter and passband width.

FIL B W B 2 . 0 K S + 2 0 0 S S B - 2 2 . 4 K R : 1 5 K S H A R P Appears when the passband is shifted.

Both controls in the center positions (or hold down

[PBT-CLR] for 1 second.) Cutting the lower passband edge Cutting both lower and higher passband edges PBT2 PBT1 PBT2 PBT1 PBT2 PBT1 Passband Passband IF center frequency Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference 75 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5

[NB]

Appears M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P 5 NB NB Level

1 5 0 %

Select the item Select a default setting

The Noise Blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as noise from car ignitions.

Push [NB] to turn the Noise Blanker function ON or OFF.

NB is displayed when the Noise Blanker is ON.

When using the Noise Blanker function, received signals may be distorted if they are excessively strong or when used for noise other than pulses. In this case, set the Noise Blanker threshold level to a shallow position, or turn OFF the function. (see below) D To deal with various types of noise, the attenuation level and noise blanking duration can be set in the NB set mode. q Hold down [NB] for 1 second to display the NB screen (Noise blanker). w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. r Push [NB] to save, and return to the previous screen.

1.

2. Set the noise attenuation level to between 1 and 10.

3. Set the blanking duration to between 1 and 100.

When the Meter Peak Hold item is set to ON in the Set mode, the peak level of a received signal strength or the output power is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds. (p. 162) Appears for 0.5 seconds. SET M e t e r P e a k H o l d 11 O N 76 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

The Noise Reduction function reduces random noise components and enhances audio signals which are buried in noise. The received signals are converted to digital signals and then the audio signals are sepa-

rated from the noise. q Push [NR] to turn ON the Noise Reduction.

w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduc-

tion level. e Push [NR] to turn OFF the Noise Reduction.

A large rotation of the [NR] control results in audio signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for maximum readability.

The Dial Lock function prevents frequency changes by accidental movement of [MAIN DIAL] by electronically locking it.

[NR]

[NR] control

Noise components Desired signal (CW)

Hold down [SPEECH/LOCK] to turn the Dial Lock function ON or OFF.

appears when the function is ON. NOTE: When the [SPEECH/LOCK] SW item is set to LOCK/SPEECH in the Set mode, pushing

[SPEECH/LOCK] turns ON the Dial Lock function.

(p. 164)

[SPEECH/LOCK]

This transceiver has Auto and Manual Notch functions. The Auto Notch function uses DSP to automatically attenuate beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if their frequencies are changing. The Manual Notch function allows you to manually attenuate a frequency via the

[NOTCH] control.

In the SSB or AM mode, push [NOTCH] to toggle the Notch function between auto, manual and OFF.

OFF in the Set mode. (p. 165)

the Manual Notch function ON or OFF.

In the FM mode, push [NOTCH] to turn the Auto Notch function ON or OFF.

[NOTCH] for 1 second to select the wide, mid, or narrow manual notch lter width.

77

[NOTCH] control

[NOTCH]

While tuning the manual notch lter, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function switches the transceiver between transmit and receive with your voice. This function provides hands-free op-

eration. D q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM, DV). (p. 43) w Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn ON the VOX function.

The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. D q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM, DV). (p. 43) w Hold down [VOX/BK-IN] for 1 second to display the VOX screen. e Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the VOX Gain item. r While speaking into the microphone, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to the point where the transceiver is continu-

ously transmitting. t If the receive audio from the speaker causes the VOX circuit to switch to transmit, push [Y] (F-1) or

[Z] (F-2) to select the Anti-VOX item. Then adjust the anti-VOX setting to the point where receive audio does not activate the VOX. y Adjust the VOX delay for a convenient interval be-

fore returning to receive after you stop speaking. u Set the VOX voice delay, if desired. i Push [MENU] to return to the previous menu.

1.

steps. Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.

2.

Higher values make the VOX function less sensitive to the received audio from a speaker or headphones.

Appears

[VOX/BK-IN]

M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P

[] []

6

[VOX/BK-IN]

[MAIN DIAL]

3.

Set the VOX delay to between 0.0 and 2.0 seconds, for normal pauses in speech before returning to re-

ceive.

4.

Set the VOX voice delay to prevent clipping of the rst few syllables of a transmission when switching to transmit. OFF, Short, Mid and Long settings can be set. When using the VOX voice delay, turn OFF the TX monitor function to prevent transmitted audio from being echoed. 78 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

(Mode: CW The Break-in function is used in the CW mode to auto-

matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and receive when keying. The IC-9100 is capable of Full Break-in or Semi Break-in. D During Semi Break-in operation, the transceiver imme-

diately transmits when you key down, then returns to receive after a pre-set delay time has passed after you stop keying. q w Push [VOX/BK-IN] one or more times to turn ON the Semi Break-in function.

e Set the break-in delay time (the delay from transmit to receive).

Hold down [VOX/BK-IN] for 1 second to display the BKIN screen (Break-in).

Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired delay.

[MENU]

[CW/RTTY]

[KEY SPEED]

[VOX/BK-IN]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears BKIN Break-IN Delay 7 . 5 d setting, if desired. r Push [MENU] to return to the previous menu. Shows break-in delay time

the keying speed. D During Full Break-in operation, the transceiver trans-

mits when you key down, then immediately returns to receive when you release. q w Push [VOX/BK-IN] one or more times to turn ON the Full Break-in function.

FBK-IN appears.

Appears

the keying speed. M1 A G C D U P 1 4 K E Y S C P 79

The Speech Compressor function increases average RF output power, improving signal strength and read-

ability. q Push [SSB] to select the USB or LSB mode. w Adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter reads within the ALC zone, whether or not you speak softly or loudly. e Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then push [COMP](F-3) to turn ON the Speech Com-

pressor. r Hold down [COMP](F-3) for 1 second to display the COMP screen (Compressor). t While speaking into the microphone at your normal voice level, rotate [MAIN DIAL] so the COMP meter reads within the COMP zone.

-

ting, if desired. When the COMP meter peaks above the COMP level zone, your transmitted voice may be dis-

torted. y Push [MENU] to return to the previous menu.

The transmit lter width for the SSB mode can be se-

lected from Wide, Mid or Narrow. q Push [SSB] to select the USB or LSB mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1), then hold down [TBW](F-4) for 1 second, one or more times, to select a Wide, Mid or Narrow transmission passband width.

TX lter width for approximately 1 second.

of the lter widths can be set in the Tone control Set mode. (pp. 169, 170)

- WIDE : 100 Hz to 2900 Hz

- MID

: 300 Hz to 2700 Hz

- NAR : 500 Hz to 2500 Hz FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6

[MENU]

[COMP]

[MIC GAIN]

[SSB]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears COMP COMP Level 5 Shows the compression level 6 COMP level zone COMP meter

[MENU]

[SSB]

[TBW]

M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P Hold down M1 A G C T B W W I D E D U P C O M P T B W S C P The selected transmit filter width is displayed for approximately 1 second. 80 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

The TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps* without changing the re-

ceive frequency.

* The [RIT/TX] control tunes in 1 Hz steps when the operating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step readout. However, the 1 Hz digit is not displayed on the frequency shift readout. q Push [TX] to turn ON the TX function.

TX and the frequency shift appear when the function is ON. w Rotate [RIT/TX]. e To reset the TX frequency, hold down [CLEAR] for

1 second.

TX frequency when the Quick RIT Clear function is ON. (p. 164) r To cancel the TX function, push [TX] again.

TX and the frequency shift disappear. When the RIT and TX functions are ON at the same time, [RIT/TX] shifts both the transmit and receive frequencies from the displayed frequency at the same time.

The frequency shift of the TX function can be added to or subtracted from the displayed frequency.

While displaying the TX frequency shift, hold down [TX] for 1 second. D When the TX function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-

lows you to listen to the transmit frequency (including the TX frequency offset).

The Monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit param-

eters. (p. 169) The CW sidetone functions regardless of the [MONI-

TOR] setting. q Push [MONITOR] to turn ON the Monitor function.

w Hold down [MONITOR] for 1 second to display the

MONI screen (Monitor). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the monitor level.

or the clearest audio output, adjust while holding down [PTT] and speaking into the microphone.

-

[CLEAR]

[TX]

[RIT/TX]

Appears M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P

[XFC]

[MENU]

[F-3]

[MONITOR]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears ting, if desired. r Push [MENU] to return to the previous menu. MONI MONITOR Level 5 0 %

Shows the monitor level 81 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6

[A/B] [SPLIT]

[XFC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and receive on two different frequencies. Split frequency operation is performed using frequencies in VFO A and VFO B.

when turning ON the One-touch repeater function. The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.

q Set 21.290 MHz in VFO A. w Push [SPLIT] to turn ON the Split operation.

e Hold down [A/B] for 1 second to equalize the trans-

mit (VFO B) frequency to the receive (VFO A) fre-

quency.

selecting the transmit frequency. See the next section for details.

r While holding down [XFC], rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz.

[XFC]. t Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit on 21.310 MHz. M1 A G C 1 4 . 1 0 0 0 0 D U P C O M P T B W S C P Shows transmit (VFO B) frequency 6 To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push

[A/B] to exchange VFO A and VFO B.

Shows transmit (VFO B) frequency

CONVENIENT

The frequency shift can be entered directly. q Push [F-INP ENT]. w Enter the desired frequency shift with the digit keys.

e Push [SPLIT] to input the frequency shift to the transmit frequency, and the Split function is turned ON.

[Example]

To transmit on a 1 kHz higher frequency:

- Push [F-INP ENT], [1] then [SPLIT]. To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:

Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating [MAIN DIAL] changes the receive frequency. To prevent this, use both the Split Lock and Dial Lock functions to change the transmit frequency only. The Split Lock function cancels the Dial Lock function while holding down [XFC] during split frequency operation. The Split Lock function is OFF by default, but can be turned ON in the Set mode. (p. 162) M1 A G C

+ 2 0 . 0 0 k D U P C O M P T B W S C P Shows frequency shift and direction

M1 A G C 2 1 . 3 1 0 0 0 D U P C O M P T B W S C P 82 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

When you hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second, the Split frequency operation is turned ON. The undisplayed VFO is automatically changed according to the plus/

minus frequency shift programmed in the Set mode. Or the VFOs are equalized when 0 kHz (default setting) is programmed as the split frequency shift. (p. 162) The Quick Split function is ON by default. For your convenience, it can be turned OFF in the Set mode.

(p. 162) In this case, holding down [SPLIT] does not equalize the VFO A and VFO B frequencies. q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO A. w Hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second.

-

ceive (VFO A) frequency. e While holding down [XFC], rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the frequency offset between transmit and re-

ceive.

-

played.

D By setting an often-used split frequency offset in ad-

vance, you can use the Quick Split function to select split operation at the push of one switch. Set the split frequency offset in advance in the SPLIT Offset item of the Set mode. (p. 162) The example at right shows the split offset is set to

+0.020 MHz.

Hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second. to activate the Quick Split function.

according to the SPLIT Offset option in the Set mode.

(p. 162)

[SPLIT]

[XFC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears M1 A G C 2 1 . 2 9 0 0 0 D U P C O M P T B W S C P Shows the equalized transmit (VFO B) frequency

SET S P L I T O f f s e t 16

(Set mode screen)

+ 0 . 0 2 0 M H z Appears M1 A G C 2 1 . 3 1 0 0 0 D U P C O M P T B W S C P Shows the shifted transmit (VFO B) frequency D The Split Lock function is convenient for changing only the transmit frequency. When the Split Lock function is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating

[MAIN DIAL], changes the receive frequency. The Split Lock function is OFF by default, but can be turned ON in the Set mode. q While split frequency operation is ON, hold down

[SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 second to activate the split lock function.

w While holding down [XFC], rotate [MAIN DIAL] to appears.

change the transmit frequency.

[MAIN DIAL], the receive frequency does NOT change. 83

[XFC] [MAIN DIAL]

[SPEECH/LOCK]

The IC-9100 has a built-in circuit for measuring an-

tenna SWR no external equipment or special adjust-

ments are necessary. The IC-9100 can measure SWR two ways spot mea-

surement and plot measurement. D q Push [TUNER] once or twice to turn OFF the an-

tenna tuner. w more times, to select the SWR meter. e mode. r Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver). t Rotate [RF POWER] clockwise past the 12 oclock

y Read the SWR on the SWR meter. u Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again) The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter to the antenna when the SWR is less than 3:1. D Plot measurement allows you to measure the SWR over an entire band. q Push [MENU] to display the M2 screen (Menu 2), then push [SWR](F-3).

w Rotate [RF POWER] clockwise past the 12 oclock

e Set the center frequency for the SWR to be mea-

sured. r Hold down [F-5] for 1 second one or more times to select 10, 50, 100 or 500 kHz steps as the SWR measuring step. t Push [F-3] one or more times to select 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 or 13 steps as the number of measuring steps. y Push [F-1] to start the measuring. u Push [TRANSMIT] or hold down [PTT] on the mi-

crophone to measure the SWR.

, appears below the SWR graph. i Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] to move the frequency marker and frequency indication to the next frequency to be measured. o Repeat steps u and i to measure SWR over the entire frequency range.

!0 When the measured SWR is more than 1.5:1, ad-

just the antenna to match with the transceiver. FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 The antenna SWR cannot be measured on the 1200 MHz frequency band*.

* The optional UX-9100 is required. The best match is in this range. D U P 1 4 R T T Y S C P 6 M1 A G C M2 S C A N M E M S W R T C O N V S C Push SWR S T E P 1 0 k Start measuring Select number of SWR measuring steps Select SWR measuring step

(after pushing [F-1]) SWR S T E P 1 0 k Frequency marker appears and moves after measurement. When mesurement points are set out-

side of the operatable frequency band, the frequency marker blinks. Typical display SWR varying between 1 and 2, full scale up to SWR 4.0:1. 3 0 1 2 0 1 1 5 1 1 0 1 84 7 DV MODE PROGRAMMING The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode opera-

tion.

sign) UR (destination call sign, whether it is an indi-

vidual or a repeater.) R1 (your access/area repeater call sign) and R2 (a destination or gateway repeater call sign). Each call sign can be programmed with up to 8 characters.

up to 60 UR call signs in the call sign memory. Up to 300 repeater call signs can be stored in the repeater list. D

-

tal voice and low-speed data communications (includ-

ing GPS transmission). q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). r Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to display the screen (). t call sign memory. y Push [EDT](F-3) to enter the call sign programming mode.

u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character to input. When inputting numbers, push the appropriate key-

pad key.

number.

i Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backwards, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forwards. o Repeat steps u and i to enter your own call sign.

radio type, area, etc.), go to step !0, otherwise go to step !2.

!0 Push [](F-3) to move the cursor right side of /.

!1 Repeat steps u and i to program the desired 4 character note.

!2 Push [MENU] to store the programmed call sign and note.

!3 Push [MENU] again to return to the CS screen. 85

[CS]/[] [EDT]

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET CS U R CQCQCQ M Y R 1 R 2 NOT USE

MY

/

MY1 C L R E D T N A M E MY

/

MY1 D E L S P C

[] []

Number input

[DEL][SPC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Cursor MY

/

MY1 D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forwards Move cursor backwards D A destination call sign must be programmed to a spe-

cic individual station or a repeater, for both digital voice and low-speed data communications. q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). r Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to display the UR screen (UR call sign setting). t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired call sign memory between U01 and U99. y Push [EDT](F-3) to enter the call sign programming mode.

u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character to input. When inputting numbers, push the appropriate key-

pad key.

number.

i Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backwards, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forwards. o Repeat step u to enter UR call sign.

!0 Push [MENU] to store the programmed call sign.

!1 Push [MENU] again to return to the CS screen.

For your information The IC-9100 has a call sign edit record function. When you edit a call sign that is stored in a call sign memory, the edited call sign is automatically pro-

grammed into a blank channel. If all call sign memories are already programmed, the edited call sign will overwrite the selected channels call sign. The programmed call sign can be over-written anytime, when the Edit Record item is set to OFF or Select, in the DV Set mode. (p. 119) However, the call sign that is stored in a regular mem-

ory or call channel must be manually overwritten.

(Temporary operation is possible). DV MODE PROGRAMMING 7

[CS]/[] [EDT]

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET CS U R CQCQCQ M Y 7 R 1 R 2 NOT USE UR

CQCQCQ UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P

UR

U01 D E L S P C 86 7 DV MODE PROGRAMMING

Call sign programming (Continued) D The access/area and link/gateway repeater call signs must be programmed in R1 and R2. Other repeater call signs can be stored in the RP-L screen (Repeater list) (p. 88).

[CS]/[] [EDT]

q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). r Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to display the R1 or R2 screen (Repeater call sign setting). t Push [EDT](F-3) to enter the call sign programming mode.

y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character to input. When inputting numbers, push the appropriate key-

pad key.

number.

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET

u Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backwards, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forwards. CS U R CQCQCQ M Y R 1 R 2 NOT USE i Repeat steps y and u to enter a desired repeater call sign.

o Push [MENU] to store the programmed call sign.

!0 Push [MENU] again to return to the CS screen.

R 1

R1 C L R E D T N A M E G R P

R1

R1 D E L S P C 87 DV MODE PROGRAMMING 7 NOTE: Repeater lists can be erased by static elec-

tricity, electric transients, etc. In addition, they can be erased by an equipment malfunction, and during repairs. Therefore, we recommend that memory data be backed up externally, or be saved to a PC using the optional CS-9100 CLONING SOFTWARE. RPT-L q CLR ADD e NAME CS GW GROUP R1USE r NO YES FREQ DUP OFFSET ADD Write w EDT Repeater 1 NAME 7 Repeater 5 CS GW GROUP R1USE NO YES FREQ DUP OFFSET ADD Write OVER Write

communication in up to 500 repeater memory chan-

nels (Repeater list) in up to 10 Groups. Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode operation. The outline of the repeater list is as follows:

q Adding new repeaters or editing a list w Selecting a repeater to edit e Programming repeater data (Repeater name, Call sign, Gateway repeater call sign, Repeater group, etc.) If a call sign has been programmed, you can skip other data programming, and write only the call sign into the Repeater list. r Programming access repeater data (Receive fre-

quency, Duplex direction, Frequency offset) D The following contents are included in the repeater list:

CLR (Repeater list clearing) (p. 92)

ADD (Repeater list addition) (p. 89)

EDT (Repeater list editing) (p. 91)

NAME (Repeater name) (p. 89)

CS (Repeater call sign) (p. 89)

GW (Gateway repeaters call sign) (p. 90)

GROUP (Repeater group) (p. 90)

R1 USE (Access repeater use) (p. 90)

FREQ (Repeater input frequency)* (p. 90)

DUP (Duplex direction)* (p. 91)

OFFSET (Frequency offset)* (p. 91)

ADD Write (Save and add to the repeater list)

(pp. 91, 92)

OVER Write (Save and overwrite to the repeater list) (p. 92)

q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

select the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [RP-L](F-4) to display the RP-L screen (Re-

peater list).

C D R > C S U R DSET M3 CS DSET D1 CS DSET A GRP1 C D R > C S U R DSET C H 4 T X M R P L S E T T X M R P L S E T RPL R e p e a t e r L i s t C L R A D D E D T RPL R e p e a t e r L i s t C L R A D D E D T 88 7 DV MODE PROGRAMMING

1. q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET When the M3 screen is selected. e Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. DSET T X M R P L S E T r Push [RP-L](F-4) to display the RP-L screen (Re-

peater list). RPL R e p e a t e r L i s t C L R A D D E D T t Push [ADD](F-3) to display the NAME item (Re-

peater name). RPL N A M E :

E D T

After programming, push [MENU] to display

-

gramming and return to the RP-L screen (Re-

peater list), or push [NO](F-5) to keep program-

ming and return to the previous screen which was selected before pushing [MENU].

2. y Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the repeater name pro-

gramming mode.

Blinks RPL N A M E :

A B C

D E L S P C i Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or

symbol to input. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push [](F-2) or

[](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL](F-4) to delete it. o Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward.

!0 Repeat steps u through i to program a name of up to 9 characters.

!1 Push [MENU] to save the name.

3.

!2 Push [Z](F-2) to display the CS item (Repeater

Call Sign).

!3 Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the repeater call sign pro-

gramming mode.

Blinks RPL C S

:

D E L S P C

!4 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or symbol (/only) to input. When inputting numbers, push the appropriate key-

pad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push [](F-2) or

[](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL](F-4) to delete it.

!5 Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward.

!6 Repeat steps !4 through !5 to program a repeater u Push [ABC](F-1) one or more times to select the desired character type. call sign of up to 8 characters.

!7 Push [MENU] to save the call sign.

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

< > ( ) [ ] { } _ @

RPL C S

: JP3YHH B E D T Be sure to add a letter after a repeater call sign, as the repeater node (port), according to the re-

peater frequency, as shown below. Note that Japanese repeater node letters are different.

Cross band operation between different nodes in the same repeater area can be made. 89 4.

When the repeater that was programmed in the pre-

vious item has its own gateway capability, skip this setting and go to the next item. If the programmed repeater uses a different gateway repeater, program gateway repeaters call sign as described below.

!8 Push [Z](F-2) to display the GW item (Gateway

Repeater Call Sign).

s call sign is displayed, and G is automatically added as, or overwrites, the 8th digit. RPL G W : JP3YHH G E D T

!9 Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the repeater call sign pro-

gramming mode.

@0 Push [](F-2) or [](F-3) to select the character to program.

@1 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or

symbol (/ only) to input. When inputting numbers, push the appropriate key-

pad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push [](F-2) or

[](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL](F-4) to delete it.

@2 Repeat steps @0 through @1 to program a repeater

call sign of up to 8 characters.

-

mon name or call sign, up to 7 digits, in all their gateway repeater cells. The 8th digit must be blank.

@3 Push [MENU] to save the programmed call sign. R5.

assign and organize up to 500 repeaters in the 10 groups. Group selection is helpful for quick recall of a desired repeater.

@4 Push [Z](F-2) to display the GROUP item (Re-

peater group).

RPL GROUP: GRP1

@5 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired repeater group. DV MODE PROGRAMMING 7

6. The programmed repeaters can be set as an access repeater (R1) in the DR mode. To use as R1, the re-

peater frequency, duplex direction and frequency off-

set must be programmed.

@6 Push [Z](F-2) to display the R1USE item (Access Repeater Programming).

RPL R1USE: YES

@7 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select

as an access repeater (R1) in the DR mode.

as an access repeater (R1) in the DR mode.

When NO is selected in step @7, skip Frequency programming (FREQ) and go to Duplex direction setting (DUP).

@7, push [Z](F-2) to go to step @8 for the access repeater (R1) program-

ming.

7. This content appears when is selected in R1 USE, as described in Access repeater setting (R1 USE) above.

@8 Push [Z](F-2) to display the FREQ item (Fre-

quency Programming).

RPL F R E Q :

. C L R E D T

@9 Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the frequency program-

ming mode.

RPL F-INP

:

.

#0 Push the keypad key to input the frequency, then push [F-INP ENT].

-

played frequency. 7 90 7 DV MODE PROGRAMMING

Repeater list programming (Continued)

8. This content appears when is selected in R1 USE as described in Access repeater setting (R1 USE) on page 90.

#1 Push [Z](F-2) to display the DUP item (Duplex di-

rection setting).

RPL D U P : OFF

#2 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the duplex direction.

OFF

DUP : The transmit frequency shifts down from the re-

: The duplex function is OFF. ceive frequency by the offset amount.

DUP+ : The transmit frequency shifts up from the re-

ceive frequency by the offset amount.

9. This content appears when is selected in R1 USE as described in Access repeater setting (R1 USE) on page 90.

#3 Push [Z](F-2) to display the OFFSET item (Fre-

quency offset Programming).

RPL O F F S E T : 0 . 0 0 0 . 0

C L R

#4 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency offset.

-

played frequency offset.

10.

#5 Push [Z](F-2) to display the ADD Write item (Re-

peater list Storing). RPL ADD W r i t e W R

#6 Hold down [WR](F-5) to store the entry.

RPL ADD W r i t e O K ?

Y E S N O

#7 Hold down to the RP-L screen.

This function re-programs a repeaters data. This is useful when already-programmed data is incorrect or some data should be added to the list.

1. q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3). M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET e Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. DSET T X M R P L S E T r Push [RP-L](F-4) to display the RP-L screen (Re-

peater list). RPL R e p e a t e r L i s t C L R A D D E D T t Push [EDT](F-5) to display the repeater list. RPL HAMACH43 E D T SEL GRP1 SEL GRP y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired repeater to be changed. RPL KOUTOU43 E D T SEL GRP1 SEL GRP

Hold down [GRP](F-5) for 1 second to enter the repeater group selection mode. ( moves next to the repeater group name, and then blinks.) Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired group (0 to 9), then push [GRP](F-5). Or, you can select the repeater group using the keypad key.

SEL appears when R1 USE setting is set to

The selected repeaters can be used as an access repeater (R1) in the DR mode, and are scanned during an access repeater scan.

[SEL](F-4).

2. u Push [EDT](F-1) to enter the repeater data pro-

gramming mode. i Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the item to be changed. o Program the selected item data. See pages 8991 for new repeater list programming details. RPL N A M E : KOUTOU43 E D T 91 NOTE: If you are reprogramming a repeater with its own gateway, you must also edit the gateway re-

peater call sign.

3.

!0 Push [Z](F-2) to select the ADD Write item, then hold down [WR](F-5) for 1 second.

ADD Write OK? appears. RPL ADD W r i t e W R

!1 list, and return to the RP-L screen. DV MODE PROGRAMMING 7

Contents of programmed list can be cleared (erased). q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3). M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET e Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. DSET T X M R P L S E T RPL ADD W r i t e O K ?

Y E S N O r Push [RP-L](F-4) to display the RP-L screen (Re-

!0 Push [Z](F-2) to select OVER Write item, then hold down [WR](F-5) for 1 second.

OVER Write OK? appears. RPL OVER W r i t e W R

!1 the selected list, and return to the RP-L screen. RPL OVER W r i t e O K ?

Y E S N O peater list). RPL R e p e a t e r L i s t C L R A D D E D T t Push [CLR](F-3) to display the repeater list. y Rotate [MAINDIAL] to select the desired repeater

list to be erased.

repeater group selection mode. ( moves next to the repeater group name, and then blinks.) Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired group (0 to 9), then push [GRP](F-5). Or, you can select the repeater group using the keypad key. 7 u Hold down [CLR](F-1) for 1 second. i to clear the selected list, and

Clear OK? appears. return to the RP-L screen. 92

 

 

8 DV MODE OPERATION

The IC-9100 can be operated in the digital voice mode, including low-speed data operation, for both transmit and receive. It can also be connected to a GPS re-

ceiver* to transmit/receive position data.

* Compatible with an RS-232 output/NMEA format/

4800bps/9600 bps

Set the desired call signs to be used for DV operation, as described below. NOTE: sign in the CS screen (Call Sign). q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call

Sign).

the name. r Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to display the

The IC-9100 has a Time-Out Timer function for digi-

tal repeater operation. The timer limits a continuous transmission to approximately 10 minutes. Warning beeps will sound approximately 30 seconds before time-out and then again immediately before time-out. Be sure to turn ON the function before operating in the digital mode. (p. 162)

[CS]/[]

[SET]

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired call sign.

UR : CQCQCQ, individual station call signs

(U01U99) or destination repeater call signs*1 is selected. CS U R CQCQCQ J A 3 Y U A M Y R 1 R 2 NOT USE

-

lected.

R2 : NOT USE*2 or a link/gateway repeater call sign is selected.

or [GRP](F-5)*3 makes it more convenient when UR, R1 or R2 is displayed. See the right column for de-

tails of the repeater call sign group selection. y Push [SET](F-4) to set the selected call sign to be used for DV operation. u Repeat steps r to y to set the other call signs. i Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to return to the CS screen. NOTE:-

peater name or the repeater call sign by pushing

[NAME](F-4) in the R1 and R2 screens.

*1 / is displayed in front of the repeater call sign. The repeater call sign with / is used for the gateway CQ calling.

*2 For an area (local) repeater communication only

(Link repeater is not used.)

*3 [GRP](F-5) is not used in the DR mode. 93 UR

C Q C Q C Q UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

J G 3 Y M K UR

S E T G R P U01 UR

J G 3 Y M K UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P

Hold down [TSGRP] or [GRP](F-5)*3 for 1 second to enter the group selection mode. Then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired group. After selecting,

*3 to display the re-

peater call signs in the group. Or, you can select the repeater group using the key-

pad key.

- Only repeaters assigned to groups are selectable. DV MODE OPERATION 8

[A/B]

[VFO/MEMO]

[DVDR]

Appears Appears M1 A G C 4 4 5 . 4 0 0 0 0 D U P A F C T O N S C P Uplink frequency Appears T disappears M1 A G C 4 4 5 . 4 0 0 0 0 D U P A F C D S Q S C P

When the IC-9100 receives a signal from a D-STAR repeater, it receives four call signs: the calling stations call sign, the called stations call sign, the R1 repeater call sign (the repeater that receives a signal from the calling station on the uplink frequency), and the R2 re-

peater call sign (the repeater that transmits a signal

call signs into your radio, and reply to the call. Repeater 445.400 MHz 445.400 MHz 446.000 MHz 446.000 MHz Uplink

(Transmit frequency) Downlink

(Receive frequency) Station A Station B

q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [A/B] once or twice to select VFO A. r Set the desired repeater transmit (downlink) fre-

quency. (p. 37)

t Push [MENU] to display the M1 screen (Menu 1). y Hold down [DUP](F-2) for 1 second to turn ON the One-touch repeater function.

bottom of the function display. u Push [DUP](F-2) once or twice to switch the offset

to the desired direction.

-

tion is not necessary (Only U.S.A. and Korean versions).

(p. 67) i Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. (p. 43)

o When a signal is received, the calling stations call

DV appears.

sign is displayed on the LCD.

-

sage, it is displayed after the call sign. See the next page to view the received call sign. To reply to the calling station, see page 96. 8 94

[] [CD]

[CLR]

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET CD JG3YMK

CQCQCQ RX01 CLR COPY CD CALLER: JG3YMK CALLED: CQCQCQ

/

COPY CD RxRPT1:

RxRPT2:

COPY CD MSG: REPEATER IS JP3 YHH A CD 2010/10/10 10:10 8 DV MODE OPERATION

When a call is received in the DV mode, the calling sta-

tion and repeater call signs being used can be stored in the received call record. The stored call signs can be displayed in the following manner. Up to 20 calls can be stored. D q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

the D1 screen. e Push [CD](F-2) to display the CD screen (Call Re-

cord). r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired record channel (RX01 to RX20).

record channel. t Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to display the call

record.

that made the call.

called, or CQCQCQ.

-

ing station accessed, or the call sign of the gateway repeater the calling station used.

heard the call on.

After the MSG screen, the date and time infor-

mation are displayed. If the received date and time are unknown, the elapsed time after the call was received is displayed (e.g. (12:34)). If the power is turned OFF, then ON, or 48 hours have passed, / / : is displayed. y Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to return to the CD screen. 95 D The calling stations call sign, which is stored in the call record, can be used to quickly and easily reply.

q Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

the D1 screen. w Hold down [R>CS](F-3) for 1 second to set the other stations call sign.

[R>CS](F-3), and after releasing, two beeps sound.

beeps sound, and no call sign is set. e Push [PTT] on the microphone to reply the call. (or push [TRANSMIT] on the transceiver) r Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

q Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

the D1 screen. w While holding down [R>CS](F-3), rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired record channel, then re-

lease [R>CS](F-3) to set it. e Push [PTT] on the microphone to reply the call. (or push [TRANSMIT] on the transceiver) r Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

For your information When you receive a call addressed to your own call sign, the call signs of the calling station and the re-

peaters they used can be automatically set for a quick reply. The set call signs are overwritten if another call is received. The following items must be set to Auto in the DV Set mode. These functions are not available in the DR mode.

The calling stations call sign is automatically set to UR.

The repeater call signs are automatically set to R1 and R2, if necessary. DV MODE OPERATION 8

[TRANSMIT]

[R>CS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET Hold down Y K /

C D R > C S U R DSET The received call sign is displayed while hold-

ing down [R>CS](F-3). Important!

One-touch call signs are for only temporary use. They are not saved in a call sign memory. Therefore, when another call sign is set, the previous call sign will be over-written. If you want to save the set call sign, see Copying the call record contents into call sign memory for details.

(p. 98) 8 96 8 DV MODE OPERATION

D The memorized UR call sign can be copied into an-

other call sign memory. NOTE:

First, make sure that the Edit Record item is set to Auto or Select in the DV Set mode. (p. 119) q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3

screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). r Push [Z](F-1) to display the UR screen. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired UR call sign channel to be copied.

y Push [EDT](F-3) to enter the call sign programming

mode.

The displayed contents from step u are different, depending on the Edit Record item setting. (p. 119)

uto A blank channel is automatically selected, and the call sign channels data, selected in step t above, is displayed. u Edit the displayed call sign as described in page 86. i Push [MENU] to store the edited call sign into the channel. NOTE: If there are no blank channels in the sta-

tion call sign memory, Full appears instead of the channel number. In this case, follow the steps in When the Edit record item is set to Select, as shown below.

the The selected call sign channels data is displayed. u Edit the displayed call sign as described in page 86. i Push [MENU] to set. o Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired call sign channel to store the data in.

!0 Hold down [SET](F-5) for 1 second to store or overwrite the edited call sign into the selected channel. 97

[] [CD]

[CLR]

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET CS U R CQCQCQ J A 3 Y U A M Y R 1 R 2 NOT USE UR

C Q C Q C Q UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

UR

J G 3 Y M K C L R E D T S E T U01 G R P UR

J G 3 Y M K

D E L S P C U06 When the Edit Record item is set to Auto. UR

J G 3 Y M

D E L S P C U01

UR

J G 3 Y M L

U01

( J G 3 Y M K ) S E T When the Edit Record item is set to Select. DV MODE OPERATION 8 D This is a way to copy the call record data (CALLER, RXRPT1 and RXRPT2) into call sign memory UR and a repeater all at the same time, or individually.

CALLERy:

u Select the desired copy destination

q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

the D1 screen. e Push [CD](F-2) to display the CD screen (Call Re-

cord). r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired record channel (RX01 to RX20). t Penter the copy item selection mode. CD JG3YMK

CQCQCQ RX01 CLR COPY y Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the item to be

copied.

call signs. COPY

to automatically search for a blank call sign memory channel, and copy the selected call sign into the de-

tected one.

memory channel selection mode. Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the de-

sired channel to be pasted.

-

nel is displayed in parentheses. Holzd down [SET](F-5) for 1 second to paste the calling stations call sign into the selected channel. If a call sign has already been programmed, the selected channel will be overwrit-

ten. CALLER: JG3YMK AUTO SEL

-

ing station accessed, or the call sign of the gateway repeater the calling station used.

the call on. COPY CALLER: JG3YMK AUTO SEL The options in step u are different, depending on your selection in step y.

ALLy:

u Select the desired copy destination.

to automatically search a blank call sign memory channel, then copy the call signs of CALLER, RXRPT1 and RXRPT2 into the channel.

to copy the call signs of CALLER, RXRPT1 and RXRPT2 into the cur-

rent UR, R1 and R2 memory.

UR

CALLER: JG3YMK

( J G 3 Y M K )

U01 S E T Push 8 When SEL is selected, memory channel num-

ber and call sign blink.

RXRPT1RXRPT2y:

u Hold down [RP-L](F-5) to copy the repeater call sign into the repeater list R1 or R2. COPY RxRPT1:

RPL i After copying has been completed, transceiver au-

tomatically returns to the CD screen.

[] [CD]

[CLR]

COPY ALL LIST CURR

[MENU]

[DVDR]

[MAIN DIAL]

98 8 DV MODE OPERATION

DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode is used for D-STAR repeater operation. In this mode, you can select the pre-programmed repeaters and UR call sign by using

[MAIN DIAL].

Select your access repeater.

- The Access repeater scan is useful to nd a repeater.

Select your destination call sign

Through an access repeater

: CQCQCQ Through a zone link repeater or gateway repeater

: Zone link repeater or Gateway repeater name

Select a zone link or gateway repeater. If you make a call through an access repeater, select NOT USE. Through an access repeater

: NOT USE Through a zone link repeater

: Zone link repeater name Through a gateway repeater

: Gateway repeater name Push PTT to transmit, release to receive.

channel (Repeater list). D

(pp. 101, 103) To call a station through your local area (access) re-

peater.

(pp. 102, 104) To call a station through your local area (access) re-

peater and a link repeater in the same zone.

(pp. 102, 104) To call a station through your local area (access) re-

peater, gateway repeater and your destination repeater by accessing the internet. 99 D1 R H R A N O 4 GRP3 C D R > C S U R DSET CS Access/Area repeater (R1) selection D1 U R C Q C Q C Q CQ CS C D R > C S U R DSET UR call sign (CQ) selection D1 U R J G 3 Y M K UR C D R > C S U R DSET CS UR call sign (specic station) selection D1 R N A R A 4 CS C D R > C S U R DSET R2 (destination repeater) selection NOTE:

Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode operation. (pp. 89 to 92)

repeater (R2) has no gateway call sign.

While operating voice communication or low-

speed data communication via the internet net-

work, some packets may be lost due to network error (poor data throughput performance). In such a case, the transceiver displays on the display to indicate Packet Loss has occurred. DV MODE OPERATION 8 D The Access repeater scan is useful to nd a repeater. For rapidly nd, the Access repeater scan skips the repeaters which are not specied as a scan target.

See page 90 or Access repeater scans target setting as described below.

q Hold down [DVDR] for 1 second to select the DR mode.

The access repeater selection screen is displayed.

- Only the repeaters, specied as a scan target are dis-

played. w Push [MENU] one or more time to display the D2 screen. e Push [SCAN](F-1) to start the Access repeater

scan.

blink while scanning.

set mode. Push [MENU] to exit the Scan set mode.

- If Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147)

r Push [SCAN](F-1) to cancel the scan.

, for faster selection and scanning. Non-selected repeaters are skipped during scanning.

When a repeater is specified as a non-scan target, its R1USE setting is automatically set to NO. In this case, the repeater cannot be selected as the access repeater.

(p. 90)

[D D2 R H I R A N O 4 SCAN SEL GRP3 A F C D S Q TCON D2 SCAN SEL A F C D S Q TCON GRP While Access repeater scanning

[SEL]

q In the DR mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

[MENU]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

display the D2 screen. w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired access

repeater.

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. See the description in page 93 for details of the repeater call sign group selection. e Hold down [SEL](F-2) for 1 second to set the select setting to ON.

r Push [SEL](F-2) to set the select setting to OFF.

t Push [MENU] to return to the D2 screen.

D2 R H A M A C H 3 SCAN SEL GRP1 A F C D S Q TCON Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

D2 R F U J S W 4 SCAN SEL GRP1 A F C D S Q TCON Hold down D2 SEL F U I S W 4 SEL GRP1 Push D2 F U I S W 4 SEL GRP1 When the select setting is OFF. 8 100 8 DV MODE OPERATION

q. Next program the repeater list (p. 89). After that, follow this guide to access a D-STAR repeater. The optional CS-9100* cloning software is helpful for programming call signs and programming the repeater list.

*Cloning cable is required. q(p. 85) w Hold down [DVDR] for 1 second to select the DR

mode.

The last used access repeater is displayed.

- If the displayed frequency band on the SUB Band is the same as that of the last used access repeater, se-

lecting the DR mode on the MAIN Band will automati-

cally move the frequency band on the SUB Band to the Main Band display, and turn OFF the SUB Band display. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired access repeater.

, whose R1USE setting is set to

are displayed.

(pp. 90, 100)

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. (p. 93)

(p. 100) r Push [UR](F-4) to enter the UR call sign selection mode. Steps t through u differ, depending on the com-

munication form.

CQ Zone q w Area e r My call sign JA3YUA Repeater q NARA43 (JP3YHL) t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select CQCQCQ.

CQCQCQ by push-

y Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

u Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears D1 CS R N A R A 4 3 GRP3 C D R > C S U R DSET Access repeater selection screen D1 R N A R A 4

GRP3 C D R > C S U R DSET CS Repeater group selection screen

[TRANSMIT]

[ MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

Appear 101 D1 U C Q C Q C Q UR CS C D R > C S U R DSET UR call sign selection screen

NOTE: The settings are the same between Zone CQ and Gateway CQ call.

CQ q w Area e r My call sign JA3YUA Repeater q NARA43 (JP3YHL) Repeater r IKOMA43 (JP3YHJ) Zone

Zone A q Area w e Gateway r MY call sign JA3YUA Repeater e Repeater y HIRANO43

(JP3YHH) IcomUSA

(N7IH) CQ t y Gateway Zone B u i t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a desired destination

repeater.

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. (p. 93) y Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

u Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again) D

manner. q After setting, push [MW] to enter the memory select write mode, then rotate [MAIN DIAL] or [M-CH] to select the desired Memory channel, Call channel or Program scan edge channel. w Hold down [MW] again for 1 second to store the set-

ting. DV MODE OPERATION 8

[TRANSMIT]

[ MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

8 Appear D1 CS U I K O M A

GRP3 C D R > C S U R DSET 3 Repeater selection screen MW 446.00000 ARAS C Q C Q DV

)

(

1 c h The selected channel number blinks. MW

.

(

) 5 c h When a blank channel is selected. 102 8 DV MODE OPERATION

This section describes how to call a specic station using the DR mode. When the Link repeater (R2) is set to GW, the des-

ignated gateway repeater is automatically set as the Link repeater, and you can make a call to a specic station through the internet. q Set your own call sign. w Hold down [DVDR] for 1 second to select the DR

mode.

The last used access repeater is displayed.

- If the displayed frequency band on the SUB Band is the same as that of the last used access repeater, se-

lecting the DR mode on the MAIN Band will automati-

cally move the frequency band on the SUB Band to the Main Band display, and turn OFF the SUB Band display. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired access

repeater.

, whose R1USE setting is set to

are displayed.

(pp. 90, 100) r Push [UR](F-4) to enter the UR call sign selection mode. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a individual station

call sign.

station call sign memory groups

(U01U99)-

nient. y Hold down [UR](F-4) for 1 second to enter the Link/

Gateway repeater (R2) selection mode.

q w Area Zone e r MY call sign JA3YUA Station call sign JG3YMK Repeater q NARA43

(JP3YHL) u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select NOT USE. i Push [UR](F-4) to exit the Link repeater (R2) selec-

tion mode. o Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!0 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

-

lect write mode. (p. 102) 103

]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

[TRANSMIT]

[UR]

[MW]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

D1 R 2 : N O T U S CS C D R > C S U R DSET NOT USE

q w Area Zone r e MY call sign JA3YUA Repeater q NARA43 (JP3YHL) Repeater r IKOMA-43 (JP3YHJ) Station call sign JG3YMK u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the link repeater in the same zone.

-

pear. i Push [UR](F-4) to exit the selection mode. i Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!0 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

-

lect write mode. (p. 102)

Zone A q Area w e Gateway r MY call sign JA3YUA Repeater e Repeater y HIRANO43

(JP3YHH G) HAMA43

(JP1YIU G) Zone B u i t y Gateway Station call sign JM1ZLK u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select GW.

-

pear. i Push [UR](F-4) to exit the Link repeater (R2) selec-

tion mode. o Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!0 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

-

lect write mode. (p. 102) DV MODE OPERATION 8

[TRANSMIT]

[UR]

[MW]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

D1 R 2 I K O M A 4 CS C D R > C S U R DSET Link repeater in the same zone

[TRANSMIT]

[UR]

[MW]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

D1 R 2 G W CS C D R > C S U R DSET Gateway repeater GW NOTE: If other station has accessed a repeater at least once, the D-STAR system will automatically connect to the last repeater the station accessed, even if you dont know where the station is. So it is no need to select the destination repeater. 8 104 8 DV MODE OPERATION

Calling a specic station (Continued) D q In the DR mode, push [MENU] one or more times to display the D1 screen. w Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). e Push [Z](F-1) one or more times to sequentially

current call sign setting. NOTE: In the DR mode, you can change only the

CS screen (Call Sign).

[MENU]

[CS]/[Z]

D1 R N A A 4 GRP3 C D R > C S U R DSET CS CS U R JG3YMK J A 3 Y U A M Y R 1 JP3YHL R 2 JP3YHJ DUR

CQ

CQ

the same zone

zone

CQ

NOTE: R1 setting is set to your access repeaters call sign. 105 DV MODE OPERATION 8

D

CQ

MY call sign JA3YUA Station call sign JG3YMK My call sign JA3YUA q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. r Set the desired frequency. (p. 37)

When the duplex operation is selected, push [MENU]

one or more times to display the M1 screen (Menu 1) and push [DUP](F-2) one or more times to turn it OFF. t Push [MENU] twice to display the M3 screen

(Menu 3). y

(p. 85) u Push [UR](F-4) to enter the UR call sign selection mode. i Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select UR call sign.

When calling CQ : Select CQCQCQ

When calling an individual station o Push [SET](F-4) to return to the M3 screen (Menu

: Select the stations call sign 3).

!0 Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!1 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

received call record. See page 95 for details.

y channel, then hold down [MW] for 1 second to save this temporary programmed data into the channel. NOTE: The digital mode is vastly different than the FM mode. One of the differences is that changing the squelch setting in the digital mode will not open it to hear the hiss of white noise, like it does in the FM mode. It is only activated for digital squelch func-

tions such as CSQL (Digital code squelch) or DSQL

(Digital call sign squelch).

[TRANSMIT]

[UR]/[SET]

[VFO/MEMO]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

M3 CS C D R > C S U R DSET UR J G 3 L U K UR G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

UR C Q C Q C Q U S E T G R P 8 106 8 DV MODE OPERATION

D-

CQ Zone q w Area e r q w Area Zone e r My call sign JA3YUA Repeater q JP3YHL My call sign JA3YUA Station call sign JG3YMK Repeater q JP3YHL q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. r Set the repeaters transmit frequency, duplex direc-

tion and offset. (pp. 37, 65, 163) t Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3). y Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). u Push [Z](F-1) to display the UR screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select UR call sign, then push [SET]

(F-4).

: Select the stations call sign

When calling CQ : Select CQCQCQ

When calling an individual station i Push [Z](F-1) to display the R1 screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select the access repeater call sign, then push [SET](F-4).

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. (p. 93)

name display, if the name has been programmed. o Push [Z](F-1) to display the R2 screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to set R2 to NOT USE, then push

[SET](F-4).

!0 Push [Z](F-1) sign if necessary, then push [SET](F-4).

!1 Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!2 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

the receive log.

received call record. See page 95 for details.

channel, then hold down [MW] for 1 second to save this temporary programmed data into the channel. 107

[TRANSMIT]

[Z]

[SET]

[GRP]

[VFO/MEMO]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

UR

J G 3 Y M K UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

C Q C Q C Q UR

S E T G R P U01 UR

C Q C Q C Q UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P R1

J P 3 Y H L R1 C L R E D T N A M E G R P

R2

C L R E D T N A M E G R P R2 MY

J A 3 Y U A MY1 C L R E D T N A M E DV MODE OPERATION 8 D

CQ q w Area e r My call sign JA3YUA Repeater q JP3YHL Repeater r JP3YHJ Zone q w Area e r My call sign JA3YUA Repeater q JP3YHL Repeater r JP3YHJ Zone Station call sign JG3YMK q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. r Set the repeaters transmit frequency, duplex direc-

tion and offset. (pp. 37, 65, 163) t Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3). y Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). u Push [Z](F-1) to display the UR screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select UR call sign, then push [SET]

(F-4).

: Select the stations call sign

When calling CQ : Select CQCQCQ

When calling an individual station i Push [Z](F-1) to display the R1 screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select the access repeater call sign, then push [SET](F-4).

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. (p. 93)

name display, if the name has been programmed. o Push [Z](F-1) to display the R2 screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select the link repeater call sign in the same zone, then push [SET](F-4).

!0 Push [Z](F-1) sign if necessary, then push [SET](F-4).

!1 Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!2 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

the receive log.

received call record. See page 95 for details.

channel, then hold down [MW] for 1 second to save this temporary programmed data into the channel.

[TRANSMIT]

[Z]

[SET]

[GRP]

[VFO/MEMO]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

8 UR

J G 3 Y M K UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

C Q C Q C Q UR

S E T G R P U01 UR

C Q C Q C Q UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P R1

J P 3 Y H L R1 C L R E D T N A M E G R P R2

J P 3 Y H J R2 C L R E D T N A M E G R P MY

J A 3 Y U A MY1 C L R E D T N A M E 108 8 DV MODE OPERATION

Repeater operation in the VFO (Continued) D

Zone A q Area w e Gateway r q Area Zone A w e r My call sign JA3YUA CQ t y Gateway Repeater q JP3YHL Repeater e JP3YHH G Repeater u JP1YIU Zone B u i My call sign JA3YUA t y Gateway Gateway Repeater q JP3YHL Repeater e JP3YHH G Repeater u JP1YIU Zone B u i q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. e Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. r Set the repeaters transmit frequency, duplex direc-

tion and offset. (pp. 37, 65, 163) t Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3). y Push [CS](F-1) to display the CS screen (Call Sign). u Push [Z](F-1) to display the UR screen, and ro-

tate [MAIN DIAL] to select UR call sign, then push

[SET](F-4).

call sign memory groups by pushing

When calling CQ : Select a link repeater call sign for sending CQ

: Select the stations call sign

When calling an individual station i Push [Z](F-1) to display the R1 screen, and rotate

[MAIN DIAL] to select the access repeater call sign, then push [SET](F-4).

more convenient, if you have programmed repeaters into Groups. (p. 93)

name display. o Push [Z](F-1) to display R2, and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select your gateway repeater call sign, then push [SET](F-4).

!0 Push [Z](F-1) sign if necessary, then push [SET](F-4).

!1 Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!2 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

the receive log.

received call record. See page 95 for details.

channel, then hold down [MW] for 1 second to save this temporary programmed data into the channel. 109 Station call sign JM1ZLK

[TRANSMIT]

[Z]

[SET]

[GRP]

[VFO/MEMO]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[D

[MAIN DIAL]

UR

J G 3 Y M K UR C L R E D T N A M E G R P Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

J P 1 Y I U UR

GRP1 S E T G R P UR

J P 1 Y I U C L R GRP1 E D T N A M E G R P R1

J P 3 Y H L R1 C L R E D T N A M E G R P R2

J P 3 Y H H G R2 C L R E D T N A M E G R P MY

J A 3 Y U A MY1 C L R E D T N A M E DV MODE OPERATION 8 DUR

CQ

CQ

the same zone

zone

CQ

NOTE: R1 setting is set to your access repeaters call sign. 8 110 8 DV MODE OPERATION

D The transceiver has a total of 5 message memories to store short messages to transmit during DV mode operation. Message of up to 20 characters can be pro-

grammed for each memory. q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [TXM](F-3) to display the TXM screen (Tras-

[EDT]

[DSET]

[MENU]

[TXM]

[MAIN DIAL]

nmit message). r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired transmit message channel.

t Push [EDT](F-1) to enter the transmit message pro-

gramming mode.

y Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired character type. TXM OFF Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

< > ( ) [ ] { } _ @

u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character to TXM TM1 E D T S E T TXM TM1HELLO A B C

D E L S P C

input. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push []

(F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL]

(F-4) to delete it. i Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward. o Repeat steps y through i to program a message of up to 20 characters.

!0 Push [MENU] to save the programmed message. While [SET](F-5) is blinking, push it to set the dis-

played channel as the first appearance channel when [TXM](F-3) is pushed in step e. 111

[] []

Number input Character type selection

[DEL][SPC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Character type display Cursor TXM TM1HELLO A B C

D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forwards Move cursor backwards Character type selection DV MODE OPERATION 8 D

ON the message transmission function. When a mes-

sage channel is selected, the transceiver transmits the pre-programmed text message. The default setting is OFF. q Set the operating frequency, call signs and other settings, such as those for repeater operation, as desired. w In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. e Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. r Push [TXM](F-3) to display the TXM screen

[TRANSMIT]

[DSET]/[SET]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[TXM]

[MAIN DIAL]

(Transmit message). t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired transmit message channel, then push [SET](F-5).

y Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. u Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit the mes-

sage. (or push [TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

(or [TRANSMIT]).

-

onds during continuous transmission.

D q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

the D1 screen. w Push [CD](F-2) to display the CD screen (Call Re-

cord). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired record channel (RX01 to RX20). r Push [Z](F-1) three times to select MSG item.

t Push [Z](F-1) or [MENU] to return to the record

channel, selected in step e. NOTE: Up to 20 messages can be stored, but only one message can be stored for each call sign. The oldest message is cleared when 21st message is received. TXM E D T

TM1:

S E T 8

For your information When a call with a message is received, the call sign and the message scrolls across the function display. The received call sign and/or message display func-

tions can be turned OFF in the DV SET mode, if de-

sired.

RX Message Disp item (p. 119)

RX Call Sign Disp item (p. 119)

[]

[CD]

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

CD JG3YMK

JA3YUA

RX01 CLR COPY After selecting the record channel, push [Z](F-1) three times. CD MSG: REPEATER IS JP3 YHH A 112 8 DV MODE OPERATION

When a non-digital signal is received during DV mode operation, the DV and FM icons simultaneously blink. The transceiver automatically selects the FM mode to monitor the signal, if the DV Auto Detect func-

tion is turned ON. q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select DV Auto De-

tect. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the DV automatic detect function.

The operating mode is set to DV if this setting is OFF. y Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. The received FM audio may be distorted when using this function.

When a call addressed to own your call sign is re-

ceived, the Automatic Reply function automatically re-

plies with your call sign. q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select Auto Reply. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the Automatic reply function. y Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. NOTE: The Automatic replay function is automati-

cally turned OFF, when [PTT] (or [TRANSMIT]) is pushed to transmit.

[] []

[DSET]/[SET]

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

Blink While receiving a non-digital signal while in the DV mode

[] []

[DSET]/[SET]

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET A u t o R e p l y 2 O N When the Automatic reply function is ON. 113

The digital squelch opens only when receiving a sig-

nal addressed to your own call sign, or a signal that

for calls from others. NOTE: Use digital code squelch function when com-

municating with two or more stations, because the digital call sign squelch function opens only when receiving a signal addressed to your own call sign. Thus the digital call sign squelch function can be used when communicating with only one station. q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M1 screen (Menu 1).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D2 screen.

and the DR mode. e Push [DSQ](F-4) one or more times to turn ON the

digital call sign squelch or digital code squelch.

ON.

When digital call sign squelch is turned ON in step e, skip steps r and t, and go to step y. r When digital code squelch is turned ON in step e, hold down [DSQ](F-4) for 1 second to display the DSQ screen. And rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired code between 00 and 99.

-

ting, if desired. t Push [MENU] to return to the M1 screen (Menu 1).

the D2 screen.

y When the received signal includes a matching call sign/code, the squelch opens and the signal can be heard.

match, digital call sign/digital code squelch does not

DV MODE OPERATION 8

[DSQ]

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears M1 A G C D U P A F C D S Q S C P 8 Appears M1 A G C D U P A F C D S Q S C P DSQ D i g i t a l C o d e 0 0 DSQ screen (Digital code setting) 114 8 DV MODE OPERATION

The EMR (Enhanced Monitor Receive) communication mode can be used in only the DV mode. In the EMR mode, no call sign setting is necessary. When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio (voice) will be heard at the specied level, even if the volume setting level is set to the minimum level, or digital call sign/digital code squelch is in use. q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w Set the desired frequency. (p. 37) e In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. r Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. t Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. y Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select EMR. u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the EMR mode.

i Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. o Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or appears.

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

!0 Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again)

blinks when receiving an EMR signal. NOTE: The EMR communication function is auto-

matically turned OFF when the transceiver is turned OFF. D The audio output level when an EMR signal is received is adjustable. When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard at the preset level, or the [AF] control level, whichever is higher. q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select EMR AF Level. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the EMR audio out-

-

mum).

[F-3] for 1 second to reset to the default set-

ting, if desired. y Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. 115

[TRANSMIT]

[]

[]

[DSET]/[SET]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears SET EMR

1 9 O N When the EMR communication mode is ON. SET E M R A F L e v e l 20 5 0 %

DV MODE OPERATION 8

[TRANSMIT]

[]

[]

[DSET]/[SET]

MAIN Band TX/RX indicator

[MENU]

[R>CS]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears SET BK

1 8 O N When the Break in function is ON. NOTE: The break-in function is automatically turned OFF when transceiver is turned OFF.

The break-in function allows you to break into a con-

versation, where the two other stations are communi-

cating with call sign squelch enabled. q While receiving another stations communication in the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen.

w Hold down [R>CS](F-3) for 1 second to set the

other stations call sign.

beeps sound, and no call sign is set. Try to capture the call sign of the signal again, or enter it manually. e Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. r Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. t Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select BK. y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the break-in func-

tion.

appears.

u Push [MENU] to return to the DSET screen. i When both stations are in standby, push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or push [TRANSMIT]

on the transceiver)

call as well as your call sign.

o Release [PTT] to receive. (or push [TRANSMIT]

again) Wait for a reply call from the station who received the break-in call.

!0 After receiving the reply call, communicate nor-

mally.

blinks when receiving a break-in call.

!1 To cancel the break-in function, turn OFF the Break-

in function in the DV Set mode as shown in steps r through y.

While using digital call sign squelch, the squelch never opens (no audio sounds) even if a call is received, unless

However, when a call including the BK ON signal (break-in call) is received, the squelch will open and audio sounds even if the call is specied for another station.

Station A and B are communicating using the digital call sign squelch. Station A and B are communicating using the digital call sign squelch. Station A Station B Station A Station B Station B never hears that Station C is calling Station A. Station C Station B also hears Station C is calling Station A. that Station C 8 116 D

Congure the serial data communication software as follows.

by the IC-9100.*1

2

*1 Depending on the PC environment, the COM port number used by the IC-9100 may be higher than 5. In such case, use the application which can set to higher than 5.

*2 Set the baud rate in the DVdat/GPS Out Baud item of the Set mode. (p. 168) D

q Set the desired call signs as described in Call sign setting. (p. 93) w Follow the instructions of the data communication application software. e Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit the data and an audio signal. (or push [TRANSMIT] on the transceiver)

The input data from the [DATA1] jack are automatically transmitted when AUTO is selected in the DV Data TX item of the DV Set mode. (p. 118)

8 DV MODE OPERATION

In addition to digital voice communication, low-speed data communication can be made. Use the optional OPC-1529R DATA COMMUNICATION CABLE with a third-party serial data communication software.

-

munication, depending on the USB2/DATA1 Func (^3) item setting in the Set mode. (p. 164) NOTE: First, turn OFF the GPS TX Mode item in the GPS Set mode to send the low-speed data. (p. 134) D Connect the transceiver to your PC using the optional OPC-1529R cable, as illustrated below. IC-9100 (Rear panel) To the [DATA1] jack PC OPC-1529R

(optional) To RS-232C port

While operating voice communication or low-speed data communication through the internet, some packets may be lost due to network error (poor data throughput performance). In such a case, the IC-9100 displays on the display to indicate Packet Loss has occurred. 117

The DV Set mode is used for programming infrequently changed values or functions in the DV mode. D DV q In the DV mode, push [MENU] one or more times to

display the M3 screen (Menu 3).

ush [MENU] once or twice to select the D1 screen. w Push [DSET](F-5) to display the DSET screen. e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the DV Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

[F-3] for 1 second to reset to the default set-

ting, if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and return to the DSET screen.

1. Turn the Standby beep function ON or OFF. This function sounds a beep when the other station stops transmitting.

If the call was sent to your call sign, the beep has a higher pitch.

2. Turn the automatic reply function ON or OFF. This function automatically replies to a call addressed to your own call sign, even if you are away from the transceiver. This function is automatically turned OFF after you push [PTT] (microphone) or [TRANSMIT].

call with your own call sign.

3.

For low-speed data communication, select whether to transmit the input data manually or automatically.

manually transmit the input data.

[DATA1] jack, the transceiver automatically transmits it. DV MODE OPERATION 8

[] []

[DSET]/[SET]

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

Displays the DV Set mode item name and number Displays the option SET Standby Beep

1 O N 1 Select the item Reset to the default setting

4.

Select the RX monitoring mode by holding down [XFC]

while in the DV mode.

Monitors in the DV mode or FM mode, de-

pending on the received signal.

8

5. Turn the digital repeater setting function ON or OFF. When accessing a repeater that has a call sign dif-

ferent than the transceivers R1 setting, this function reads the repeaters downlink signal and automatically sets the correct repeater call sign into R1.

6.

Turn the RX call sign automatic write function ON or OFF. When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign, this function automatically sets the call sign of the call-

ing station into UR. While in the DR mode, this function is disabled.

station into UR. 118 8 DV MODE OPERATION

DV Set mode description (Continued)

7.

Turn the repeater call sign automatic write function ON or OFF. When you receive a call addressed to your own call sign through a repeater, this function automatically sets the repeater call signs included in the signal, into your current R1 and R2. While in the DR mode, this function is disabled. OFF : Turns OFF the function. Auto : Automatically sets the call sign of the used re-

peater into your R1 and R2. DV Auto Detect 8.

Turn the DV mode automatic detect function ON or OFF. When receiving other than a DV mode signal, dur-

ing DV mode operation, this function automatically switches to the FM mode.

Turns OFF the function. The operating mode is fixed to the DV mode.

Automatically selects the FM mode for tem-

porary operation. The received FM audio may be distorted when re-

ceiving an FM signal with this function.

9. Select an option for the call sign edit record function. When a call sign in the memory is edited, this function saves the new call sign in a different memory than the original one.

OFF

: Turns OFF the function. The previously set call sign is overwritten with the edited call sign.

Select : The edited call sign is programmed into the

Auto selected call sign memory.

: The edited call sign is automatically pro-

grammed into a blank memory.

10.

Turn the gateway automatic set function ON or OFF for calling an individual station in the DR mode. This function enables the transceiver to automatically set the pre-programmed gateway repeater in R2.

UR, the previously used repeater call sign re-

mains in R2.

UR, the pre-programmed gateway repeater is au-

tomatically set in R2. 119

11.

The transceiver can record data of up to 20 individual calls. Select whether to record all calls or only the latest call whose called station did not reply, or whose Link re-

peater was not found.

ALL

Latest Only : Records only the latest call.

: Records all calls.

12.

When a call is received, the call sign of the calling sta-

tion can be automatically displayed.

OFF

Auto

: Turns OFF the function.

: Automatically displays the call sign of the calling station.

13.

Select whether or not to display the programmed call

-

sion.

OFF

UR

: Turns OFF the function.

: Displays the call sign of the station you called.

: Displays your own call sign.

14.

Select whether or not to display and scroll a received message.

OFF

Auto

: Does not display the message. To check the message, push [CD] (F-2) in M3, and then select MSG.

: Automatically displays and scrolls the mes-

sage.

15. Select the scrolling speed of a message or call sign.

Slow : Sets the scrolling speed to Slow.

Fast

: Sets the scrolling speed to Fast.

16.

Select whether or not to display a selected station or repeater call sign when the DR mode is selected, or when you switch the UR, R1 and R2 display while in the DR mode.

17.

LCD when the transceiver is turned ON.

OFF

: Turns OFF the function.

18.

The break-in function allows you to break into a con-

versation where two other stations are communicating with call sign squelch enabled. See page 116 for details.

appears on the display. NOTE: The break-in function is automatically turned OFF when the transceiver is turned OFF. EMR 19.

The EMR communication mode can be used for digital mode operation. In the EMR mode, no call sign setting is necessary. When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio (voice) will be heard at the specied level even if the volume setting level is set to minimum level, or digital call sign/digital code squelch is in use. See page 115 for details.

appears on the display. NOTE: The EMR communication function is auto-

matically turned OFF when the transceiver is turned OFF.

20.

(maximum) to set the audio output level when an EMR signal is received. When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard at the programmed level, or the [AF] control level, whichever is higher. DV MODE OPERATION 8 8 120 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

DV mode. To receive GPS data, connect a third-party GPS receiver that has an RS-232C output and NMEA data format. Third-party GPS receivers connect to the

[DATA1] jack of the transceiver. In addition, GPS messages can also be transmitted in the GPS mode. D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [POS](F-1), [GPM](F-2), [MSG](F-3) or [SET]

(F-5) to select the desired menu. See the diagram below.

To the [DATA1] jack OPC-1529R

(optional)

(Rear panel) GPS receiver to the RS-232C port

( null modem adapter is required)

[POS]

[GPM]

[SET]

[MENU]

[MSG]

[CALL/GPS]

The screen you want to appear rst can be se-

lected between GPS and Position in the GPS 1st Menu item of the Set mode. (p. 165) M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P Hold down

(p. 123) M Y P o s i t i o n

G L W R Approximately 2 seconds M 3 5 4 5 . 0 0 N E L E : f t 1 3 5 3 6 . 0 0 E 1 2 : 0 0 : 0 0

[F-1]

Push

GPS P O S G P M M S G S E T

[F-2]

[F-3]

[F-5]

121

(p. 127) GPM R X A L M

(p. 125) MSG G P S M e s s a g e T X M R X M

(p. 132) SET G P S R e c e i v e r B a u d

1 4 8 0 0 D The transceiver transmits GPS data or low-speed data to the PC through the [DATA1] jack, depending on the Set mode setting. (p. 168) q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select USB2/DATA1 Func. (64) e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select GPS as the func-

tion of the [DATA1] jack to be used for position data input. r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode. GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

[] []

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET U S B 2 D A T A 1 F u n c 64 G P S ]

GPS (default) D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [SET](F-5) to enter the GPS Set mode. e Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select GPS TX Mode.

[] []

[SET]

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select GPS.

-

ter items as described in step t will not appear. t Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired GPS sentence.

GSV are selectable. y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn the sentence ON or OFF.

-

ting, if desired. u Repeat steps t and y to select another GPS sen-

tence.

i Push [MENU] to save, and return to the GPS screen. NOTE:

Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the GPS message to conventional digital transceivers

(IC-2820H, IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD, IC-E91, IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H, ID-1). The GSV sentence is incompatible with them. Those transceivers will not display GPS messages properly if a GSV sentence is sent from the IC-9100.

[MENU]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C GPS P O S D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down G P M M S G S E T SET G P S T X M o d e 12 Push Push G P S Select SET G P S S e n t e n c e ( R M C ) 13 O N When RMC sentence usage is set to ON. 9 122 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS operation (Continued) D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [POS](F-1) to display the position data. Then push [F-2] one or more times to display your current position, received position or GPS memory alarm position information.

North or South as the top of the compass.

-

tude, direction*, elevation* and the time*.

* These items do not appear when

-

sition item option in the GPS Set mode. (p. 132)

latitude, longitude, call sign, direc-

tion and distance from your posi-

tion.

-

nels latitude, longitude, direction and distance from your position, if the GPS Alarm function is set to the channel.

channels or a bank, is displayed instead of the position information.

e Push [MENU] to return to the GPS screen. NOTE: Depending on the GPS signals, your posi-

tion/elevation may change even though you are sta-

tionary. These sample indications assume that Position For-

mat is selected as dddmm.mm, and Units is se-

lected as feet/mile. (p. 132) TIME data may not be displayed, depending on the connected GPS receiver. 123

[POS]

[MENU]

[F-2]

[CALL/GPS]

GPS P O S G P M M S G S E T Push

M Y P o s i t i o n G L W R Approximately 2 seconds M 2 0 3 5 . 0 0 N E L E :

1 6 f t 1 3 4 2 6 . 0 0 E 1 2 : 0 0 : 0 0 Push

R X P o s i t i o n G L W R Approximately 2 seconds R 3 5 4 5 . 0 0 N J A 3 Y M K 1 3 5 3 6 . 0 0 E D S T : 1 0 5 1 m l Push

G P M P o s i t i o n G L Approximately 2 seconds G 3 5 4 5 . 0 0 N 1 3 5 3 6 . 0 0 E D S T : 1 0 5 1 m l GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

[F-2]

[F-5]

[POS]

[CALL/GPS]

M 3 5 4 5 . 0 0 N 1 3 5 3 6 . 0 0 E G L : P M 7 5 T S Hold down

[] []

[SET]

9 D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [POS](F-1), then push [F-2] once or twice to display your own or the callers (other station) posi-

tion information.

screen.

e Hold down [F-5] for 1 second to save the position data to GPS memory (G00).

the next Memory channel already contains information.

D The Grid Locator expresses the latitude and longitude position data in a short string of characters. The IC-

9100 can display it on the LCD. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [POS](F-1), then push [F-2] one or more times to display the position information. e While holding down [F-4], the grid locator informa-

tion is displayed. D In the DV mode, this function automatically transmits the GPS receivers current position data, at a selected interval. When a GPS message is programmed, the transceiver transmits it along with the position data. See page 125 for the GPS message programming. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the

[MENU]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

GPS screen. w Push [SET](F-5) to enter the GPS Set mode. e Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select GPS Auto TX. r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired position

3, 5, 10 or 30 minutes, or OFF.

* If four GPS sentences are selected in GPS Set mode on page 122, 5 sec. cannot be selected.

t Push [MENU] to save, and return to the GPS screen. NOTE:

GPS automatic transmission. (p. 93)

Use GPS automatic transmission in only the sim-

plex mode.

GPS automatic transmission through a repeater may interfere with other communications. SET G P S A u t o T X 11 O F F OFF (default) 124 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS operation (Continued) D Enter a GPS message of up to 20 characters to be transmitted with the position data. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [MSG](F-3) to display the MSG screen (GPS Message). e Push [TXM](F-1) to display the TXM screen (TX Message Edit).

r Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired character type.

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

( ) [ ] { } _ @

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or

symbol to input. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push []

(F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL]

(F-4) to delete it. y Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward. u Repeat steps r to y to program a message of up to 20 characters. i Push [MENU] to save the message, and return to the MSG screen (GPS Message). o Push [MENU] again to return to the GPS screen. 125

[TXM]

[MSG]

[MENU]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C GPS P O S D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down G P M M S G S E T Push MSG G P S M e s s a g e T X M R X M Push TXM A B C

D E L S P C

[] []

Keypad

[F-1]

[DEL][SPC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Character type Cursor XM I m

A B C

D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forward Move cursor backward Select the character type D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [MSG](F-3) to display the MSG screen (GPS Message). e Push [RXM](F-2) to display the RXM screen (RX

message).

When the received GPS message includes more than 36 characters, push [F-1] to display the rest of the mes-

sage. r Push [MENU] to return to the MSG screen (GPS Message). t Push [MENU] to return to the GPS screen. GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

[RXM]

[MSG]

[MENU]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

MSG G P S M e s s a g e T X M R X M Push RXM H E L L O 9 126 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

The transceiver has 50 GPS memory channels to store the received position data, or other-used position data, along with an alphanumeric channel name. D q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select ALL or a desired memory bank.

The bank can be selected in Memory bank setting, as

described on page 128. r Push [LIST](F-1), then push [ADD](F-1) to enter the ADD screen (GPS Memory Add) to manually add new data.

When the ADD screen is selected, push

(F-4) to cancel programming and return to the GPM screen, or push [NO](F-5) to keep pro-

gramming and return to the ADD screen.

[GPM]/[]

[LIST]/[ADD]/[]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C GPS P O S D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down G P M M S G S E T Push GPM R X A L M Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

GPM A L L L I S T C L R A L M t Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the item. Push

q When NAME is selected, push [EDT](F-4) to GPM 0 0 :

A D D E D T C L R A L M enter the memory name programming mode.

w Push [F-1] one or more times to select the de-

sired character type.

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

< > ( ) [ ] { } _ @

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character

or symbol to input. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

symbol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push

[](F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push

[DEL](F-4) to delete it. r Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forward. t Repeat steps w through r to program a name of up to 9 characters. y Push [MENU] to save the programmed name, and return to the ADD screen. 127 Push ADD N A M E :

E D T W R Select the item

[F-1]

[] []

Keypad

[MENU]

[DEL]

[SPC]

[MAIN DIAL]

Character type Cursor ADD N A M E :

abc

D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forward Move cursor backward Select the character type GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

u When LAT is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to enter the desired latitude data.

](F-3) to select the digit.

i Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to save the pro-

grammed latitude data, and select other item.

o When LON is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

enter the desired longitude data.

](F-3) to select the digit.

!0 Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to save the pro-

grammed longitude data, and select other items.

!1 When TIME is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

enter the desired time data.

] to move the cursor forward and back-

ward.

!2 Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to save the pro-

grammed time data, and select other item.

!3 When BANK is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired bank letter.

!4 Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the bank name pro-

gramming mode.

!5 Repeat steps w through r of Name programming on the previous page to program a bank name of up to 9 characters.

!6 Push [MENU] to save the programmed bank name, and return to the ADD screen. t After programming, hold down [WR](F-5) for 1 sec-

ond to write the data into the GPS memory, and return to the GPM screen (GPS Memory). y Push [MENU] two times to return to the GPS screen. Blinks North latitude is selected. ADD L A T :

0 0 . 0 0 N

W R Select the item Select the digit Write into the GPS memory

(This illustration is based on entering a latitude.)

Blinks ADD T I M E :

: :

W R Select the item Select the digit Write into the GPS memory

Bank A is selected. ADD B A N K : A E D T W R Blinks Push ADD B A N K : A abc

D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forward Move cursor backward Select the character type 9 128

[GPM]/[EDT]/[]

[LIST]/[]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C GPS P O S D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down G P M M S G S E T Push GPM R X A L M Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

GPM A L L L I S T C L R A L M Push GPM 0 0 :

A D D E D T C L R A L M Push EDT N A M E :

E D T W R Select the item 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS memory operation (Continued) D The GPS memory name, latitude and longitude data, time data and a memory bank name can be edited. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select ALL or desired mem-

ory bank.

The bank can be selected in Memory bank setting, as

described on page 128. r Push [LIST](F-1), then push [EDT](F-2) to enter the EDT screen (GPS Memory Edit) to edit the pro-

gramed data.

When the EDT screen is selected, push [MENU]

-

cel programming and return to the GPM screen, or push [NO](F-5) to keep programming and re-

turn to the ADD screen.

t Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the item. y Enter a memory name, latitude data, longitude data, time and memory bank name, as described in steps q to !6 of D Add a GPS memory on pages 127 and 128. u After programming, hold down [WR](F-5) for 1 sec-

ond to write the data into the GPS memory, and return to the GPM screen (GPS Memory). y Push [MENU] two times to return to the GPS screen. 129 D A GPS alarm can sound when a target position comes into the alarm area. This function can be set to the caller station, all GPS Memory channels, a specied Memory bank or a specied Memory channel. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired memory

group, or memory channel.

selected.

(F-1) when ALL or a memory bank is selected. r Push [ALM](F-5) to turn ON the Alarm function.

t Push [MENU] to return to the GPS screen.

For your information!

e, the alarm functions depend on Alarm Area2 setting in the GPS Set mode. (p. 133)

e, the alarm functions depend on Alarm Area1 setting in the GPS Set mode. (p. 133) GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

[GPM]

[ALM]

[MENU]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

M1 A G C GPS P O S D U P A F C T O N S C P Hold down G P M M S G S E T Push GPM R X A L M Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

GPM A L L L I S T C L R A L M Push GPM A L L L I S T C L R A L M 9 Appears when the Alarm function is ON. 130 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS memory operation (Continued) D

q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select ALL. r Hold down [CLR](F-3) for 1 second to clear all Memory channels.

t

y Push [MENU] two times to return to the GPS

To cancel clearing, push [NO](F-5). screen.

q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired Memory bank. r Hold down [CLR](F-3) for 1 second to clear the se-

lected Memory bank.

t

y Push [MENU] two times to return to the GPS

To cancel clearing, push [NO](F-5).

[GPM]

[YES]

[NO]

[LIST]

[CLR]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

GPM A L L L I S T C L R A L M Hold down GPM A L L C l e a r O K ?

Y E S N O GPM A :

L I S T C L R A L M Hold down GPM B A N K C l e a r O K ?

Y E S N O screen.

q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [GPM](F-2) to display the GPM screen (GPS Memory). e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select ALL or a Memory bank, then push [LIST](F-1). r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired GPS Memory channel to be cleared. t Hold down [CLR](F-3) for 1 second to clear the se-

GPM 0 0 :

A D D E D T C L R A L M Hold down GPM C l e a r O K ?

Y E S N O lected Memory channel.

y

y Push [MENU] two times to return to the GPS

To cancel clearing, push [NO](F-5). screen. 131

GPS Set mode The following individual settings are selectable in the GPS Set mode. Set them to suit your GPS operating needs. q Hold down [CALL/GPS] for 1 second to display the GPS screen. w Push [SET](F-5) to enter the GPS Set mode. e Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. t Push [MENU] to save, and return to the GPS screen. GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

[]

[]

[]

[SET]

[MENU]

[F-3]

[CALL/GPS]

[MAIN DIAL]

Displays the Set mode item name and number Displays the option SET G P S R e c e i v e r B a u d 1 4 8 0 0

1.

Set the baud rate of the GPS receiver to 4800 bps or 9600 bps.

7.

Select either GPS or Manual to enter your current po-

sition. Select the item Reset to the default setting

2.

mm.mm Select either the dddmm.mm or dddmmss" format to display position information.

3.

Select either meter or feet/mile format to display the distance and elevation information.

4. Select the compass display type. When the position data is displayed, push [F-1] to se-

lect the compass type.

north.

south.

5.

Set the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) and the local time to between 14:00 and +14:00 in 00:05 steps.

6. Turn the GPS icon (

) display function ON or OFF.

does not appear. appears on the display when a valid po-

data is received.

However, when the GPS receiver is con-

nected to the transceiver, this setting will automatically switch to GPS.

N 8.

Manually enter your latitude and longitude data. The manually programmed data can be memorised. This item does not appear when GPS is selected in My Position. q Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the position data edit mode. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select LAT or LON, and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to enter the desired posi-

tion data.

e Hold down [WR](F-5) to write the data. 9 132 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS Set mode (Continued)

9.

When the GPS Alarm function is set to ALL or one of the memory banks, set the GPS alarm active range. When dddmm.mm is selected in Position Format, the active range can be set to between 0008" and 5999" in 0001" steps. When dddmmss" is selected in Position Format, the active range can be set to between 0005" and 5959"

in 0001" steps. See page 132 for details.

Alarm Area1 setting : 00.25

Point A 00.25 00.25 Point B N Your position 5 2

. 0 0 5 2

. 0 0 Point C Point D

( This description is based on the dddmm.mm posi-

tion format When a target position enters the alarm area, the GPS alarm sounds. 133

10.

When the GPS Alarm function is set to the memory channel or RX, set the GPS alarm active range to Both, Extended or Limited.

-

proximate 500 meter range, the GPS alarm sounds three times.

-

proximate 1 kilometer range, the GPS alarm sounds three times.

-

proximate 1 kilometer range, the GPS alarm sounds one beep, and when it is in the approximate 500 meter range, the alarm sounds three beeps. 500 meter (547 yard) 1 kilometer (1094 yard)

Your position Extended range

(approx. 1 km; 1094 Y) Limited range

(approx. 500 m; 547 Y) The target position denitions for Alarm Area 2.

When a target position comes into the alarm area, the icon below appears. Blinks M1 A G C D U P A F C T O N S C P GPS Auto TX 11.

Select the desired interval from OFF, 5, 10, 30 sec-

onds, 1, 3, 5, 10 or 30 minutes for automatic position data transmission. The current position data, received from a GPS re-

ceiver, is transmitted at the selected interval when GPS or GPS-A is selected as the GPS TX Mode option as described below. The GPS message is transmitted as well as the posi-

tion data, if it is programmed. Even if this setting is set to OFF, you can manually transmit the position data by pushing [TRANSMIT] or

[PTT] (microphone). NOTE:

same time, 5sec cannot be selected.

current position data will not be automatically transmitted. GPS TX Mode 12.

Select the GPS or GPS-A operating mode to transmit the position data from a GPS receiver, or turn OFF the function. NOTE: When GPS or GPS-A is selected, low-

speed data communication cannot be used.

13.

Turn the GPS sentence formatter RMC ON or OFF.

*1

14.

Turn the GPS sentence formatter GGA ON or OFF.

*1

15. Turn the GPS sentence formatter GLL ON or OFF.

*1

16.

Turn the GPS sentence formatter GSA ON or OFF.

*1

17.

Turn the GPS sentence formatter VTG ON or OFF.

*1 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9

18.

Turn the GPS sentence formatter GSV ON or OFF.

*1

time.

19.

*2

Enter an unproto address of up to 56 characters. The manually programmed data can be memorized.

q Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the unproto address edit mode. w Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired character type.

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

( ) [ ] { } _ @

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or symbol to input.

-

propriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push []

(F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL]

(F-4) to delete it. r Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward.

9 t Repeat steps w through r to program an unproto address of up to 56 characters. y Push [MENU] to save the unproto address, and re-

turn to the SET screen.

*1 Appears when GPS is selected in GPS TX Mode.

*2 Appears when GPS-A is selected in GPS TX Mode. 134 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

GPS Set mode (Continued)

*

20.

Set the data extension capability to Course/Speed or OFF. When you select Course/Speed, the transceivers course and speed information is transmitted along with the position data. NOTE: When Course/Speed is selected, Com-

ment (Extension) appears instead of Comment, and number of characters is limited to 36.

*

21.

Select either the DHM or HMS format to transmit the current UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time as a time stamp, or turn OFF the function.

and Minute format.

and Second format.

*

22.

Select the desired GPS-A symbol which represents your means of transportation. Selectable symbols:

Small Aircraft, Ship, Car, Motorcycle, Balloon, Jeep, RV, Truck, Van, House QTH (VHF) and Other If there is no symbol you want to use, you can make a desired symbol code, as described below.

q Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select Other.

w Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the programming mode.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst digit character

. to input.

r Push [](F-3) to select the second digit.

.

* Appears when GPS-A is selected in GPS TX Mode. 135 t Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired character type.

ABC abc etc

A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

[ ] { } _ @ (space) y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the second digit char-

acter to input. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key. u Push [MENU] to save the symbol code, and return to the SET screen. When Other is selected, check the symbol codes of APRS, and set them correctly.

*

SSID 23.

To assist in identifying a stations type, the displayed APRS based SSID is added after the GPS-A data call sign.

use a capital letter, it will be used as an SSID.

be deleted.

sign. If you use a capital letter, it will be replaced with the SSID.

NOTE: If you have multiple transceivers, your call signs are distinguished by a single capital letter in the D-STAR* system. When you use an SSID, the capital letter will be replaced by the SSID, depend-

ing on the setting.

*

24. Program a comment of up to 43 characters. The programmed comment is transmitted with the GPS position data. See Comment programming, as described below. This item appears when Data Extension is set to OFF, as described on page 135.

*

25. Program a comment of up to 36 characters. The programmed comment is transmitted with the GPS position data. See Comment programming, as described below. This item appears when Course/Speed is selected in Data Extension, as described on page 135.

q Push [EDT](F-4) to enter the programming mode.

w Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired

character type.

ABC abc etc A to Z a to z

" ` ^ +

( ) [ ] { } _ @

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or

symbol to enter. When inputting numbers or a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push

[](F-2) or [](F-3) to select a character, then push

[DEL](F-4) to delete it. r Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backward, or push

[](F-3) to move the cursor forward. t Repeat steps w through r to program a comment of up to 43 characters*.

* 36 characters can only be programmed when Course/

Speed is selected in Data Extension. y Push [MENU] to save the comment, and return to the SET screen. GPS/GPS-A OPERATION 9 9 136 9 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

D Set the following to activate the GPS-A function. q Push [DVDR] to select the DV mode. w Enter the GPS Set mode. e Set the desired position data transmitting interval in GPS Auto TX. (p. 134) r Select GPS-A in GPS TX Mode. (p. 134) t Set the GPS-A mode operations items. (pp. 134 136)

our own call sign Unproto address D In GPS-A operation, the following codes are transmit-

ted to the PC connected to the IC-9100. GPS-A code is based on APRS code.

(APRS : Automatic Position Reporting System) Time stamp H.M.S (Hour/Minute/Second)

D.H.M (Day/Hour/Minute) Time stamp Latitude Longitude JA3YUAR GPS-A symbol (Car) Data extension Comment

Connect a USB cable* between the transceivers USB port on the rear panel and the PC. (p. 26) When DV dat is selected as the USB2/DATA1 Func

(63) item option, the GPS-A data can be send from the USB port. (p. 167)

* Purchase separately

Connect the optional OPC-1529R between the trans-

ceivers [DATA1] jack on the rear panel and the PC.

(p. 26) When DV dat is selected as the USB2/DATA1 Func

(64) item option, the GPS-A data can be send from the

[DATA1] port. (p. 168) 137 MEMORY OPERATION 10

The transceiver has 106 Memory channels in each fre-

quency band. (99 regular, 6 scan edges and 1 call) The Memory mode is very useful to quickly change to often-used frequencies. While in the memory mode, all 106 Memory channels are tunable, which means the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with [MAIN DIAL]. NOTE:

Memory data can be erased by static electricity, elec-

tric transients, etc. In addition, they can be erased by malfunction and during repairs. Therefore, we recom-

mend that memory data be backed up or be saved to a PC using the optional CS-9100 CLONING SOFT-

WARE.

199 1A/1b3A/3b C Regular Memory channels with Split frequency capability.*

Program Scan Edge Memory channels with only Simplex capability. Stores the scan edge frequencies for programmed scans. Call channel with Split frequency capability*. Instantly recalls a specied frequency.

*Usable only on HF/50 MHz frequency bands. D The following information can be programmed into Memory channels:

( Usable only on the regular Memory channels and Call channel on HF/50 MHz frequency bands.)

-

set (pp. 65, 163)

DTCS squelch ON/OFF (pp. 62, 63)

-

quency or DTCS code with polarity (pp. 62, 63)

(p. 114)

The optional UT-121 is required for DV mode operation. 10 138 10

When the SUB Band setting is turned ON, you can se-

lect a Memory channel in the SUB Band as well as in the MAIN Band. (p. 33)

appears when the SUB Band setting is ON. D q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select a Memory channel num-

ber.

-

ory channel number.

selected.

appears when no information has been pro-

grammed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel) e Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode.

D q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select a Memory channel.

-

ory channel number.

selected.

appears when no information has been pro-

grammed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)

-

phone [UP]/[DN] keys. In such case, the blank channels are skipped.

Each frequency band has its own Call channel. Fac-

tory default frequency and operating modes are pro-

grammed into the Call channel. Change these to suit your operating needs. (see page 141) q

w

screen display.

[VFO/MEMO]

[M-CH]

Appears if the selected Memory channel has no information. While in the VFO mode While in the Memory mode

Appears 139

Memory channels can be programmed in either the VFO mode or the Memory mode. D q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. w Set the desired settings into both VFO A and VFO B.

Select the band using [BAND](MAIN/SUB).

Set the frequency with [MAIN DIAL] or the key-

pad. (p. 37)

Set the operating mode with the mode switch.

(p. 43)

Set other data (e.g. frequency offset, duplex di-

rection, tone squelch, split frequency operation, etc.), if desired. (p. 138) e Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel num-

ber to be programmed.

appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel. r Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

memory programming is complete. D q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel to be programmed.

-

play.

appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel. e Set the desired settings into the Memory channel.

Set the frequency with [MAIN DIAL] or the key-

pad. (p. 37)

desired frequency using the keypad.

Set the operating mode with the mode switch.

Set other data (e.g. frequency offset, duplex di-

rection, tone squelch, etc.), if desired. r Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

complete. NOTE: If you perform the above operations in a pre-

programmed channel, the previous channel data will be overwritten.

10

[MW]

[M-CH]

[BAND](MAIN/SUB) Keypad Mode selection

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXAMPLE]:

Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into the Mem-

ory channel 12 while in the VFO mode.

[EXAMPLE]:

Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into Memory channel 18 while in the Memory mode. 10 140 10

The Call channel is programmed in the same way as the regular Memory channels are. It is convenient to program a most-often-used frequency into the Call channel for quick recall. As with Memory channels, the Call channel can also hold split frequencies, and other parameters. See page 138 for details. q Rotate [M-CH] to select the Call channel.

w Select the desired frequency and operating mode

A capital C appears. to program into the Call channel. e Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the dis-

played frequency and operating mode into the Call channel.

-

plete.

IMPORTANT!

you cannot change the memory contents. However, when the Call channel is selected using [M-CH] in the VFO or Memory mode, the memory contents can be changed.

Any no-longer-used regular Memory channels can be cleared, and then become blank channels. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select the regular Memory chan-

nel to be cleared. e Hold down [M-CLR] for 1 second to clear the con-

tents.

-

plete. appears. r To clear other Memory channels, repeat steps w and e.

When a blank channel is selected, or after clearing the Memory channel contents, the icon ap-

pears, and then after 2 seconds, the operating band appears. The operating band appears. 141

[MW]

[M-CH]

Appears Appears

[VFO/MEMO]

[M-CLR]

[M-CH]

Hold down

The Memory channel contents (frequency, operating mode, etc.) can be copied to the VFO. The copy can be performed in either the VFO mode or the Memory mode. D This is useful for copying programmed contents to a displayed VFO. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel num-

ber to be copied.

appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied. e Hold down [VFO/MEMO] for 1 second to copy the Memory channel contents into the VFO.

D This is useful for copying the Memory channel con-

tents while operating in the Memory mode. When you have changed the displayed frequency, operating mode, etc. in the selected Memory chan-

nel:

data is copied.

contents in the Memory channel are not copied, but remain only in the Memory chan-

nel. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel to be copied.

appears if the selected Memory channel is a blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied.

e Hold down [VFO/MEMO] for 1 second to copy the Memory channel contents into the VFO.

r Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode.

10

[VFO/MEMO]

While in the VFO mode

[M-CH]

Hold down The Memory channel contents are transferred While in the Memory mode Hold down Push The Memory channel contents are transferred 10 142 10

All Memory channels, including scan edges and Call channel, can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 9 characters each.

[EXAMPLE]: Programming a memory name into Memory channel 99. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the Memory mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select Memory channel 99. e Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). r Push [MEM](F-2) to display the MEM screen

(Memory Menu). t Push [EDT](F-1) to display the EDT screen (Mem-

ory name Edit).

beep sounds after pushing [EDT](F1). y Push [F-1] one or more times to select the desired character type.

u Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the rst character or

symbol to input. When inputting numbers and a decimal point, push the appropriate keypad key.

-

bol or number.

programmed, an error beep sounds. If you want to reprogram, push [](F-2) or

[](F-3) to select a character, then push [DEL](F-4) to delete it. i Push [](F-2) to move the cursor backwards, or push [](F-3) to move the cursor forwards. o Repeat steps y to i to program a memory name of up to 9 characters.

!0 Push [MENU] to save the name, and return to the MEM screen (Memory Menu).

!1 Push [MENU] to return to the M2 screen (Menu

[EDT]

[MEM]

[VFO/MEMO]

[MENU]

[M-CH]

M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C Push MEM E D T

(

14.19500 USB

) S E L Push EDT A B C

D E L S P C

[] []

Keypad 2).

ABC abc etc 143

[F-1]

[DEL][SPC]

[MAIN DIAL]

A to Z a to z

" ` ^ + _ @

[EXAMPLE]: Programming DX spot into Memory channel 99. Character type Cursor EDT D X s p o t abc

D E L S P C Input a space Delete a character Move cursor forwards Move cursor backwards Select character type

10

The transceiver has a Memo pad function to store the displayed data for easy writing and recalling. The memo pads are separate from the Memory channels. The default number of memo pads is 5. However, you can increase the number to 10 in the Memopad Num-

bers item of the Set mode, if desired. (p. 164) Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-

rize the displayed data temporarily, such as when you nd a DX station in a pile-up, or when a desired station is busy for a long time and you want to temporarily search for other stations. Use the transceivers memo pads instead of relying on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced. D

When you store the 6th data into memo pads, the old-

est stored entry is automatically erased, to make room for the new data. NOTE: Each memo pad must have its own unique

be written.

[MP-W]

Push Memo pads Newest M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P In this example, 21.347 MHz (USB) will be erased when 21.280 MHz (LSB) is written. D

more times while in either the VFO or Memory mode.

recently written.

[MP-R]

Push

[MP-R]

Push M1 A G C D U P C O M P T B W S C P Oldest Erased 10 When you call up a memo pad, the previously dis-

played data is automatically stored in a temporary pad. The temporary pad can be recalled by pushing [MP-R]

one or more times.

frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the temporary pad) are called up by [MP-R]. If you change the data called up from a memo pad, the stored temporary pad data is replaced with the changed data. Memo pads Newest Oldest 144 11 SCANS

Scanning automatically searches for signals and makes it easier to locate new stations for contact or lis-

Programmed scan, Memory scan, Select Memory scan, Mode Select scan and F (Delta Frequency) scan. PROGRAMMED SCAN (p. 149) Repeatedly scans between scan edges. P1 scans between 1A and 1b, P2 scans between 2A and 2b, and P3 scans between 3A and 3b frequencies. This scan operates in the VFO mode. 1A 2A 3A Scan edges Scan Jump 1b 2b 3b The MAIN and SUB Bands can be independently scanned. When the SUB Band setting mode is turned ON

(

appears), the SUB Band is scanned. MEMORY SCAN (p. 150) Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory chan-

nels. This scan operates in the memory mode. Mch 2 SEL Mch 3 Mch 4 Mch 1 SEL SEL Mch 5 Mch 99 SEL Mch 7 SEL Mch 6 MODE SELECT SCAN (p. 150) Repeatedly scans all selected mode Memory chan-

nels. This scan operates in the memory mode. SELECT MEMORY SCAN (p. 151) Repeatedly scans all Select Memory channels. This scan operates in the memory mode. USB FM CW Mch 2 SEL Mch 3 Mch 4 FM FM Mch 1 SEL SEL Mch 5 FM FM USB Mch 99 SEL Mch 7 SEL Mch 6 F SCAN (p. 152) Repeatedly scans within the F span area. This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. Center frequency

(Start frequency) F frequency

+F frequency Scan Jump 145

Program scan edge frequencies into Program Scan Edge channels 1A3A and 1b3b. (p. 148)

Program two or more Memory channels. (Program Scan Edge channels will not be scanned.) (p. 140)

Program two or more Memory channels, all with the same operating mode. (p. 43)

Program two or more Memory channels as Select Memory channels. (p. 151)

Set the F span (F scan range) in the SCAN screen.

(p. 152)

-

tecting a signal in the Scan Set mode. The Scan Re-

sume function must be set before operating a scan.

(p. 147)

The scan speed can be set to high or low in the Scan Set mode. (p. 147)

This function is useful when you do not want unmodu-

lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the Voice Squelch Control (VSC) function is ON, the re-

ceiver checks received signals for voice components. The scan pauses, or is cancelled, if a received signal includes voice components, and the tone of the voice components changes within 1 second. See Squelch status as described above. The scan resumes if the received signal includes no voice components, or the tone of the voice compo-

nents does not change within 1 second. q Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] once or twice to select the operating mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). e Push [VSC](F-5) to turn the VSC function ON or OFF. appears when the VSC function is ON.

(SSB, AM and FM).

-

lated signals, regardless of whether the Scan Re-

sume function is set to ON or OFF. SCANS 11

How the [MAIN DIAL] functions during a scan, can be set in the Scan Set mode. (p. 147)

When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less:

The scan continues until it is stopped manually it does not pause*, even if signals are detected.

* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and then opened. The scan resumes, or is cancelled, depending on the Scan Resume setting. When the tuning step is 5 kHz or more:

If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each step when a signal is detected, then resumes. If the Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.

If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each channel when a signal is detected, then resumes. If Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.

The scan pauses when signals are detected. The scan resumes, or is cancelled, depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting. 11 146 Appears M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C 11 SCANS

The scan speed, Scan Resume function and [MAIN DIAL] scan function can be set in the Scan Set mode. q Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). w Push [SCAN](F-1) to display the SCAN screen. e Push [SET](F-5) to enter the Scan Set mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

value. y Push [MENU] to save, and return to the SCAN screen.

[SCAN]/[]

[]

[SET]

[MENU]

[F-3]

[MAIN DIAL]

M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C u Push [MENU] again to return to the M2 screen Push SCAN PROG:P1 P R O F F I N

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T S E T 1 SCAN Speed HIGH Push Push S E T 2 SCAN Resume O N Push S E T 3 MAIN DIAL (SCAN) U p / D o w n

(Menu 2).

1.

Select the desired scan speed between high and low.

: The scan is slower. SCAN Resume 2. Set the Scan Resume function ON or OFF.

10 seconds, then resumes. When a signal dis-

appears, the scan resumes 2 seconds later.

-

celled.

3.

Select how the [MAIN DIAL] functions, during a scan.

-

ning direction. 147

Memory channels 1A3A and 1b3b are the Program Scan Edge channels. They are used to program the upper and lower frequency edges for programmed scans. (p. 149) Each frequency band has its own Scan Edge chan-

nels. Factory default frequency and operating modes are programmed into the Scan Edge channels. If both upper and lower band edges are programmed with the same frequency, a programmed scan can-

not start. EXAMPLE: Programming 14.00000 MHz into 1A and 14.35000 MHz into 1b. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. w Rotate [M-CH] to select scan edge 1A. e Set 14.00000 MHz as the lower frequency. r Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program

14.00000 MHz into scan edge 1A.

-

plete. t Rotate [M-CH] to select scan edge 1b. y Set 14.35000 MHz as the upper frequency. u Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program

14.35000 MHz into scan edge 1b.

-

plete. i If 1A/1b is selected as the scanning range when a programmed scan is started, it will search for sig-

nals between 14.00000 MHz and 14.35000 MHz.

(p. 149) SCANS 11

[VFO/MEMO] [MW]

[M-CH]

Programming 14.00000 MHz into 1A Programming 14.35000 MHz into 1b 11 148 11 SCANS

A programmed scan searches for signals between Program Scan Edge channels 1A3A and 1b3b. Before starting the programmed scan, scan edges must be programmed into these channels. See the previous page for scan edge programming. If the same frequencies are programmed into the Program Scan Edge channels, the programmed scan will not start. q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. w Push the mode switch to select the desired operat-

ing mode.

-

ning. e Push [TS] one or more times to select a tuning step.

(p. 38)

r Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). t Push [SCAN](F-1) to display the SCAN screen. y Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.

setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for details.

modes. (pp. 44, 162) u Hold down [PRO](F-1) for 1 second to select the desired scan range between P1, P2 and P3.

-

nels 1A1b (P1), 2A2b (P2) or 3A3b (P3). i Push [PRO](F-1) to start the programmed scan.

range display blink while scanning.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147) o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume function, the VSC function or the squelch sta-

tus.

!0 Push [PRO](F-1) to cancel the scan. D When a signal is received during Fine programmed scan, the scanning tuning step is temporarily set to 10 Hz and the scan speed decreases.

q through i as described above. q Start the programmed scan.

w While scanning, push [FIN](F-3) to switch the scan function between a programmed scan and a Fine programmed scan. e Push [PRO](F-1) to cancel the scan. 149

[SCAN]/[PRO]

[VFO/MEMO] [TS]

[RF/SQL]

[MENU]

Mode switches M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C Push SCAN PROG:P1 P R O F F I N

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T Hold down SCAN PROG:P2 P R O F F I N

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T Push SCAN PROG SCAN:P2 P R O F F I N SPAN S E T While Programmed scanning SCAN PROG SCAN:P2 P R O F F I N SPAN S E T Push SCAN FPROG SCAN:P2 P R O F F I N SPAN S E T While Fine programmed scanning

D A Memory scan searches for signals through Memory channels 1 to 99. Blank (unprogrammed) Memory channels are skipped. NOTE: For a Memory scan to start, two or more Memory channels must be programmed. (p. 140) q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the memory mode. w Push [MENU] to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). e Push [SCAN](F-1) to display the SCAN screen. r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.

setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for details.

modes. (pp. 44, 162) t Push [MEM](F-1) to start the Memory scan.

blink while scanning.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147) y Push [MEM](F-1) to cancel the scan. D Repeatedly scans all Memory channels with the same operating mode as the displayed mode. NOTE: For a Mode Select scan to start, two or more Memory channels must be programmed, and their operating mode must be the same as the displayed mode. q Follow steps q through r as described above. w Hold down [MEM](F-1) for 1 second to turn ON the Mode Select scan.

e Push the mode switch to select the desired operat-

ing mode to be scanned. r Push [MEM](F-1) to start the Mode Select scan.

SCAN blink while scanning.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147)

by holding down [MEM](F-1) for 1 second. t Push [MEM](F-1) to cancel the scan. SCANS 11

[SCAN]/[MEM]

[VFO/MEMO]

[RF/SQL]

[MENU]

M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C Push SCAN M E M F S E L

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T Push SCAN MEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T While Memory scanning

[SCAN]/[MEM]

[VFO/MEMO]

11

[RF/SQL]

[MENU]

Mode switches SCAN MODESEL SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T While Mode Select scanning 150 11 SCANS

Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued) D All Memory channels can be set as Select Memory channels, except for the Scan Edge and Call channels.

When the SCAN screen is displayed, push [SEL]

(F-3), or when the MEM screen (Memory Menu) is displayed, push [SEL](F-5) to set or cancel the displayed Memory channel as a Select Memory channel.

Memory channel.

channel is a blank channel.

[SEL](F-3) or [SEL](F-5) for 1 second

clear all Select Memory channel settings. D Select Memory scan searches for signals through Memory channels specied as Sel (Select). NOTE: For a Select Memory scan to start, two or more Memory channels must be designated as Se-

lect Memory channels. (See above) q Follow steps q through t as described in D Memory scan on the previous page, to start Mem-

ory scan.

turns ON the Mode Select scan. w Push [SEL](F-3) to turn ON the Select Memory

scan.

Mode Select scan)* and Select Memory scan.

*Only when the Mode Select scan is turned ON.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147) e Push [MEM](F-1) to cancel the scan. Appears SCAN M E M F S E L

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T SCAN screen MEM E D T

(

14.19500 USB

) S E L MEM screen (Memory Menu) SCAN MEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T Push SCAN SELMEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T While Select Memory scanning

Memory scan Select Memory scan SCAN MEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T Hold down

[MEM](F-1) Mode Select scan SCAN MODESEL SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T SCAN SELMEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T Select Memory scan SCAN SELMEMO SCAN M E M F S E L SPAN S E T Push

[SEL](F-3) Push

[SEL](F-3) 151

F (Delta Frequency) scan searches for signals within the specied range with the displayed VFO frequency or Memory channel frequency as the center frequency. The frequency range is specied by the width of the selected span. q Push [VFO/MEMO] once or twice to select the VFO mode or memory mode. w Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). e Push [SCAN](F-1) to display the SCAN screen. r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.

setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for details.

modes. (pp. 44, 162) t Push [SPAN](F-4) one or more times to select the desired F span width.

500 kHz and 1 MHz are selectable. y Set the center frequency of the F scan.

DIAL] to set the center frequency.

-

sired Memory channel whose frequency will be the cen-

ter frequency. u Push [F](F-2) to start the F scan.

F SCAN, the MHz and kHz decimal points blink while scanning.

Up/Down is selected as the MAIN DIAL (SCAN) option in the Scan Set mode, rotating [MAIN DIAL]

changes the scanning direction. (p. 147)

i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume function, VSC function or the squelch status. o Push [F](F-2) again to cancel the F scan. D When a signal is received during Fine F scan, the scanning tuning step is temporarily set to 10 Hz and the scan speed decreases. q Start F scan.

w While scanning, push [FIN](F-3) to switch the scan

q through u as described above. function between F scan and Fine F scan. e Push [F](F-2) to cancel the scan. SCANS 11

[SCAN]

[VFO/MEMO]

Keypad

[M-CH]

[MENU]

[F]

[SPAN]

[MAIN DIAL]

M2 SCAN M E M S W R TCON V S C Push SCAN M E M F S E L

F : 1 0 k SPAN S E T Push SCAN M E M F

F S E L

F : 2 0 k SPAN S E T Push SCAN F SCAN M E M F F I N

2 0 k SPAN S E T While F scanning 11 SCAN M E M F

F SCAN F I N

2 0 k SPAN S E T Push SCAN F F SCAN M E M F F I N

2 0 k SPAN S E T While Fine F scanning 152 12 SATELLITE OPERATION

Both Satellite Mode B (435 MHz uplink, 145 MHz downlink) and Mode J (145 MHz uplink, 435 MHz downlink) can be operated with the IC-9100, and Mode L can be operated when the optional UX-9100 1200 MHz BAND UNIT is installed.

Orbit information describes satellite location, reach-

ing angles, etc. This information may be available in ham magazines or organization publications, such as those from ARRL, RSGB handbook, etc. Satellite communications is possible only when a sat-

ellite is in view and its transponder is operating. Satellite tracking software is also convenient. FUJI 3 (FO-29) 145 MHz band 435 MHz band 435 MHz band Uplink Downlink 145 MHz band

Uplink frequency Downlink frequency Tracking direction CW beacon frequency : 435.7950 MHz

: 145.9000146.0000 MHz

: 435.8000435.9000 MHz

: Reverse

1. NEVER set the output power too high. Too much power will shorten the satellites life. Set your transmit power so that your downlink sig-

nal level is lower than the beacons signal level. 2. Conrm a satellites operating mode in advance through documentation (magazines, etc.) or via ap-

propriate satellite tracking software. In the wrong mode, you cannot use the satellite, even if you re-

ceive its beacon signal.

Operating frequencies in the satellite mode can be se-

lected either before or after selecting the mode. Nor-

mal and reverse tracking are selectable. D

q Select the downlink frequency (receive) in the MAIN band, and the uplink frequency (transmit) in the SUB band. 3. Preampliers may be necessary to receive satel-

lite signals. Optional ampliers, AG-25, AG-35 and AG-1200* (for the UX-9100), can be used with the IC-9100. (p. 71)

* AG-1200 has been discontinued, but it can be still be used. 4. When you use a reverse tracking satellite in the SSB mode, use LSB for the uplink frequency and USB for the downlink frequency.

use USB for both the uplink and downlink frequencies.

[SATELLITE]

w Hold down [SATELLITE] for 1 second to transfer the frequencies, selected in step q, to the satellite VFO.

-

ferring.

and the last operated tracking icon (

) appear. or

band during satellite mode. 153

q Push [SATELLITE] to enter the satellite mode. appear.

w Push [VFO/MEMO] to toggle between the satellite and either or

VFO and Memory mode.

band while in the satellite mode. e Push [MAIN](1.8 1) to enable downlink frequency tuning.

r Select the downlink frequency and the operating mode.

t Push [SUB](3.5 2) to enable uplink frequency tun-

ing.

NOTE: To select the operating mode for uplink, push

[SUB] to enable the SUB band setting mode. In the DR mode, pushing [SATELLITE] cancels it, and then switches the transceiver to the satellite mode. If you want to operate in the DR mode after exiting

1 second.

q Push [SATELLITE] to enter the satellite mode.

w Push [NOR/REV](7 3) to toggle between normal and either appears. or

and reverse tracking. D Both downlink and uplink frequencies simultaneously increase or decrease in the same steps when you ro-

tate the [MAIN DIAL]. D The downlink frequency follows the tuning dial rota-

tion, however, the uplink frequency changes in the reverse direction to the [MAIN DIAL] rotation, in the same steps. SATELLITE OPERATION 12

[VFO/MEMO]

[SUB]

[SATELLITE]

[MAIN]

(1.8 1)

[SUB]

(3.5 2) Mode switch

[MAIN DIAL]

[M-CH]

MAIN Band Downlink (Receive) frequency SUB Band Uplink (Transmit) frequency

[SATELLITE]

[NOR/REV]

(7 3) 12

[MAIN DIAL]

Satellite and tracking icon Varies simultaneously 154 12 SATELLITE OPERATION

The IC-9100 has 20 satellite memory channels (CH 00 to 19) to memorize both uplink and downlink frequen-

cies, operating modes and other data. D q Push [SATELLITE] to enter the satellite mode. w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the satellite memory mode.

beside the uplink frequency (SUB band) display. e Rotate [M-CH] to select a satellite mode Memory channel. D q Push [SATELLITE] to enter the satellite mode. w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the satellite memory mode. e Rotate [M-CH] to select the desired Memory chan-

nel. r Select the desired downlink frequency in the MAIN band, and uplink frequency in the SUB band, as well as the operating mode. t Hold down [MW] for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

memory programming has completed. NOTE: Tracking selection, normal or reverse, is not programmed in the satellite memory channels. Downlink (Receive) frequency Satellite memory channel Uplink (Transmit) frequency Select the desired satellite memory channel 155

q Decide on a usable satellite, and point your antenna direction towards it. w Conrm the approximate location of the satellite and operating mode (e.g. B, J, etc.) through a publication (magazine, etc.) or an appropriate sat-

ellite tracking software. e Push [SATELLITE] to enter the satellite mode. r Push [NOR/REV](7 3) to toggle between normal and reverse tracking. t Select the operating mode as listed below.

before selecting the operating mode. Downlink Satellite

(MAIN band) Reverse tracking type USB (or CW) Normal tracking type USB (or CW) Uplink

(SUB band) LSB (or CW) LSB (or CW) y Select the desired downlink frequency in the MAIN band to match the beacon frequency.

-

tion.

its strongest level.

power during a loop test. u Perform a loop test.

q Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a vacant frequency, within the satellites coverage, as the downlink frequency on the MAIN band. w Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. (or

[TRANSMIT] on the transceiver) e Push [SUB](3.5 2), then select the uplink fre-

quency on the SUB band while transmitting a single tone such as a whistle to nd your down-

link signal and monitor your own signal correctly. r Push [SUB](3.5 2) again after setting. NOTE: To avoid excessive power, set the output power so that the downlink signal strength is lower than the beacons strength. i Select the desired frequency to begin your satellite communications.

-

taneously. o When your downlink audio drifts (Doppler effect), push [SUB](3.5 2) then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the uplink frequency (SUB band). After adjusting, push [SUB](3.5 2) again.

the RIT function (push [RIT]).

!0 To exit the satellite operation, push [SATELLITE].

For your convenience As the transceiver has 20 satellite memory channels, once entered, desired satellite frequencies can be recalled instantly. SATELLITE OPERATION 12 Downlink (receive) frequency Satellite and tracking icon Uplink (transmit) frequency Select the downlink frequency to match with the beacon frequency. Select a vacant frequency as the downlink fre-

quency, within the satellites coverage. Adjust the uplink frequency 12 156 12 SATELLITE OPERATION

When your own signal can be received with a loop test, satellite communication can be performed. q When a frequency is shifted by the Doppler effect, push [SUB](3.5 2), then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to re-

tune the uplink frequency.

w When the other stations signal frequency is shifted, push [MAIN](1.8 1), then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to re-

tune the downlink frequency.

RIT. (p. 69)

157 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 13

The IC-9100 has 2 antenna connectors for the HF/50 MHz bands, [ANT1] and [ANT2], and a dedicated an-

tenna connector for each of the 144 MHz, 430 MHz

-

tors.

band the IC-9100 covers. When you change the operating band to one outside of the current memorized antenna band, the antenna is automatically selected for the new band. (See below) This function is especially convenient when you use 2 antennas for HF and 50 MHz band operation. To use the band memory, select Auto as the [ANT]

Switch option in the Set mode. (p. 163)

(default) Once an antenna has been selected for use with a

-

matically selected whenever that band is accessed.

[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to

[ANT1], a 21/28/50 MHz antenna is connected to

[ANT2]. When the antenna selector function is set to Auto, the correct antenna is automatically selected when you changes bands.

function is disabled. In this case, you must select an antenna manually.

1200 MHz* bands are automatically selected.

[EXAMPLE]: an optional antenna tuner and HF an-

tenna are connected to [ANT1] and a 50 MHz an-

tenna is connected to [ANT2].

-

tor is always selected during HF and 50 MHz bands operation.

3.5/7 MHz 21/28/50 MHz 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz bands bands band band band*

[ANT1]

[ANT2]

[144MHz ANT]

[430MHz ANT]

[1200MHz ANT]

HF bands 50 MHz bands 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz band band band*

AH-4

[ANT1]

[ANT2]

[144MHz ANT]

[430MHz ANT]

13

[1200MHz ANT]

* The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. 158 13 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

The internal automatic antenna tuner automatically matches the transceiver to the selected antenna. After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable capacitor set-

tings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency range, the variable capacitors are automati-

cally preset to the memorized setting. CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when no antenna is connected. This will damage the trans-

ceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.

For your convenience When you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want to change the antenna settings, you can erase all of the internal antenna tuner preset points with Tuner Preset Clear in the Set mode. (p. 163) D

Push [TUNER] to turn ON the internal antenna tuner. The antenna is automatically tuned when the antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.

appears.

D Transmitting in SSB with a soft voice, the internal tuner may not automatically tune correctly. In such cases, manual tuning is helpful. NOTES:

and 50 MHz bands the 144 MHz, 430 MHz and 1200 MHz* bands cannot be tuned.

NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-

nected to each antenna port in use.

-

-

ing farther than 100 kHz from an antennas pro-

grammed preset point, hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to start manual tuning.

the AM mode. In such cases, hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to manually tune.

[TUNER]

Hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to start manual tuning.

blinks and the TX/RX indi-

cator (MAIN Band) lights red while tuning.

disappears and the TX/

after 20 sec. of tuning, RX indicator (MAIN Band) goes out.

the 50 MHz band)

If the tuner still cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after checking the above, perform the following:

for higher frequencies in some cases.) Even if manual tuning does not match the antenna and the tuner turns OFF the rst time, it may match the an-

tenna the second time.

Some antennas, especially for the low bands, have a narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned beyond the edge of their operating bandwidth, therefore, manually tune such an antenna as follows:

Suppose you have an antenna which has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz. q Select 3.55 MHz and hold down [TUNER] for 1 second. to start manual tuning. w Select 3.80 MHz and hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to start manual tuning.

159 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 13

(HF bands only) If you want to deactivate the tuner when the VSWR is 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start function and turn OFF the tuner. This function activates the tuner automatically when the SWR is high, and is con-

trolled in the Set mode. (p. 163).

-

ble longer than the specified time period in the SSB or CW mode operation.

Tuning of the internal*/external antenna tuner starts when [PTT] is pushed on a new frequency that is

This function removes the holding down [TUNER]

operation, and starts tuning on the first transmission on a new frequency.

*Tuning starts if the internal antenna tuner is ON. This function is turned ON in the Set mode. (p. 163).

The optional AH-4 matches the IC-9100 to a long wire antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above).

-

Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to re-

tune the antenna before transmitting when you change the frequency even slightly. tion. q Select the desired frequency in an HF or 50 MHz

-

tenna connection details. AH-4 setting example:

For mobile operation Optional AH-2b antenna element For outdoor operation

band for use with the AH-4.

the ham bands. w Hold down [TUNER] for 1 second.

e blinks while tuning. appears constantly when tuning is com-

plete.

dis-

appears and the AH-4 is bypassed. At that point the an-

tenna wire connection root is to the transceiver directly, and not via the AH-4 antenna tuner. r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER]. Long wire

[TUNER]

R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE!

NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or transmitting. CAUTION: operate the AH-4 without an antenna wire or element. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged. NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is not grounded. Transmitting before tuning may damage the trans-

ceiver. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a 12 long wire or multiple of the operating frequency. When connecting the AH-4, the antenna connector assignments are [ANT2] for the internal tuner and

[ANT1] for the AH-4. The antenna icon in the LCD displays ANT when the AH-4 is connected and se-

lected.

When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-PW1/EUROs tuner, tune when the internal tuner is turned OFF. After tuning has completed, turn ON the internal tuner. Otherwise, both tuners simultaneously tune, and proper tuning may fail. See the instruction manual included with each antenna tuner for their respective operations. 13 160 14 SET MODE

The Set mode is used for programming infrequently changed values or functions. D q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. r Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode.

[]

[]

[]

[MENU]

[F-3]

[MAIN DIAL]

Displays the Set mode item name and number Displays the option SET L C D C o n t r a s t 1 5 0 %

Select the item Reset to the default setting

1.

2.

NOTE: Regardless of this setting, the LCD backlight

-

sign. (It is not an equipment malfunction.) Then, the brightness level automatically returns to the ad-

justed value.

3.

Adjust the conrmation and band edge beep tones

4.

Turn the conrmation and band edge beep tones out-

put level limiting ON or OFF. When you set this item to ON, the beep tones are ad-

justed by the [AF] control until rotating the [AF] control reaches the level specied in the Beep Level item, as described above. Further rotation will not increase the volume of the beep tones.

specied in Beep Level, above. 161

5. Turn the conrmation beep ON or OFF. Set the beep output level in the Beep Level item as described to the left.

-

tion)

switch is pushed.

6.

When you tune into or out of an amateur bands fre-

quency range, you can hear a beep tone.

program a total of 30 band edge frequencies in the User band Edge item.

the Beep Level item as described to the left.

default amateur bands frequency range, a beep sounds.

programmed amateur bands fre-

quency range, a beep sounds.

programmed amateur bands fre-

quency range, a beep sounds. In addition, transmission is inhibited outside the programmed range.

7. This User Band Edge item appears only when ON

Edge Beep item. (p. 161)

the Band Edge Beep item, you can program a total of 30 band edge frequencies in this item. See page 42 for programming details.

8.

Set a desired beep frequency for the MAIN Band to between 500 Hz and 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps.

the Beep Level item. (p. 161)

9.

Set a desired beep frequency for the SUB Band to be-

tween 500 Hz and 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps.

the Beep Level item. (p. 161)

10. Set the [RF/SQL] control operation.

squelch control in AM, FM and DV.

s as a squelch con-

trol.

s as a noise squelch or an as an S-meter squelch in SSB, CW, , AM and DV.

11. Turn the Meter Peak Hold function ON or OFF.

When this function is set to ON, the peak level of a re-

ceived signal strength or the output power is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.

12.

Turn the FM and DV center error detection ON or OFF. When an off-frequency signal is received, the MAIN and SUB Bands TX/RX indicators blink. SET MODE 14

13.

To prevent a prolonged transmission, the transceiver has a Time-Out Timer function. If a continuous transmission exceeds the set period, the transmission will be cut off. Set the time period to 3, 5, 10, 20 or 30 minutes, or turn OFF the Time-Out Timer function.

14. Turn the PTT Lock function ON or OFF.

To prevent accidental transmissions, this function in-

hibits transmitting, when turned ON.

15. Turn the Quick Split function ON or OFF.

When this item is set to ON, hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second to shift the transmit frequency from the receive frequency, according to the SPLIT Offset option as described below. See page 83 for details.

16. Set the offset* for the quick split function.

*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.

The frequency offset can be set to between 9.999 MHz and +9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. SPLIT LOCK 17. Turn the Split Lock function ON or OFF.

When this item is set to ON, you can use [MAIN DIAL]

to adjust the transmit frequency while holding down

[XFC], even while the Dial Lock function is enabled. See pages 82, 83 for split frequency operation de-

tails. 14 162 14 SET MODE

Set mode description (Continued)

18.

repeater offset for each band.

*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.

When you select this item, hold down [BAND](MAIN/

SUB) for 1 second to select the desired frequency band. Then, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the offset.

and 9.9999 MHz*.

*99.9999 MHz for the 1200 MHz frequency band.

The default value may differ, depending on the se-

lected frequency band and transceiver version. NOTE:

-

tion is OFF for the HF/50 MHz frequency band.

is selected, or the satellite mode is ON. The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation.

19. Set the one touch repeater shift direction.

receive frequency by the offset amount.

receive frequency by the offset amount.

20.

1 ; for U.S.A. version

; for Korea version ON

(Only U.S.A. and Korea versions) Set the Auto Repeater function ON or OFF. To activate the Auto Repeater function, rst program the auto repeater frequency range, then select ON. (p. 67) U.S.A. version:

Korea version:

163

21.

Turn the Automatic Antenna Tuner function ON or OFF. This function is for only the HF bands.

when the SWR is high.

tuning when the SWR is high, even if the tuner is turned OFF.

22.

Whenever you push [PTT], the internal or external an-

tenna tuner automatically starts tuning if the operat-

last-tuned frequency.

you push [PTT] on a new frequency, if the in-

ternal antenna tuner is ON.

(External antenna tuner) Tuning always starts when you push [PTT] on a new frequency, re-

gardless of whether the external antenna tuner is ON or OFF.

23. Select the desired antenna. The selected antennas preset memory* is cleared by holding down [CLR](F-4) for 1 second.

* The variable capacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz steps) after the tuner matches an antenna.

is cleared.

is cleared.

24.

Set the antenna switch function to Auto, Manual or OFF. When you change the operating frequency on the HF/

50 MHz frequency band, this function will automatically select the correct antenna, or you must do it manually.

[ANT1] connector is always selected.

-

manually change the antenna by pushing

25.

26.

Select English or Japanese as the speech language.

27.

Select HIGH (faster) or LOW (slower) speech speed.

28.

The signal level announcement with the voice synthe-

sizer can be turned ON or OFF.

-

quency and mode are announced.

are announced. SPEECH [MODE] SW 29.

Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON or OFF. When this function is ON, the selected operating mode is verbally announced when a mode switch is pushed.

[SPEECH/LOCK] SW 30. Select the [SPEECH/LOCK] switch action.

switch turns ON the voice synthe-

sizer function. Holding down the [SPEECH/LOCK]

switch turns the dial lock function ON or OFF.

switch turns the dial lock function ON or OFF. Holding down the [SPEECH/LOCK]

switch turns ON the voice synthe-

sizer function.

31. Set the number of available memo pads to 5 or 10. See page 144 for details.

SET MODE 14 MAIN DIAL Auto TS 32.

Set the Auto Tuning Step function for [MAIN DIAL]. When rapidly rotating [MAIN DIAL], the tuning step au-

tomatically changes as selected. There are two types of auto tuning steps: LOW (Faster) and HIGH (Fastest).

-

mately 2 times faster when the tuning step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.

33.

Set the rate at which frequencies are scanned while holding down the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches.

34.

Select the RIT/TX frequency offset clearing opera-

tion with [CLEAR].

RIT and TX frequency offset.

TX frequency offset.

35.

Turn the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) limit function ON or OFF. The AFC function automatically compensates the tun-

ing when a received frequency drifts or goes off fre-

quency.

displayed frequency changes to reflect the center of the signal.

-

quency goes off the limited frequency range, even if received frequency is off frequency. AFC limit value:

IF Filter width 15 kHz 10 kHz 7 kHz AFC limit value 10 kHz 7 kHz 5 kHz 14 164 14 SET MODE

Set mode description (Continued)

36.

Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch lter to be used for SSB mode operation.

Only the Auto notch lter can be used.

used.

can be used.

37.

Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch lter used for AM mode operation.

Only the Auto notch lter can be used.

used.

can be used.

38.

Turn the manual notch lter width display ON or OFF. When this item set to ON, and the manual notch lter is selected with [NOTCH], and the manual notch lter width appears on the function display.

39.

Turn the IF lter passband width and shift value dis-

play ON or OFF. When this item set to ON, and the [TWIN PBT] control is rotated, the passband width and shifting value ap-

pear on the function display.

40.

Turn the IF lter passband width and shift value dis-

play ON or OFF. When this item set to ON, and [FILTER] is pushed, the passband width and shifting value appear on the function display. 165

41.

Turn the displayed frequency shift function ON or OFF. When this function is turned ON, the audio pitch or tones of the received signal will remain the same, even when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW. The amount of frequency shift may differ, depending on the CW pitch setting.

-

erating mode is changed between SSB and CW.

42.

Select the sideband used to receive CW in the CW normal mode between LSB and USB.

43.

screen (Menu 1), when the CW mode is selected.

44.

Select GPS-Root or GPS-POS as the menu that ap-

pears rst after holding down [CALL/GPS].

45.

Switch the preamplifier control ON or OFF. When using the optional AG-25, ON must be selected. Oth-

erwise, the preamplier is never enabled. DO NOT connect any equipment, such as an SWR or power meter, between the transceiver and preampli-

er. In such case, the preamplier may not function correctly.

46.

Switch the preamplifier control ON or OFF. When using the optional AG-35, ON must be selected. Oth-

erwise, the preamplier is never enabled. DO NOT connect any equipment, such as an SWR or power meter, between the transceiver and preampli-

er. In such case, the preamplier may not function correctly.

47.

Switch the preamplifier control ON or OFF. When using the optional AG-1200*, ON must be selected. Otherwise, the preamplier will not function.

*AG-1200 has been discontinued, but it can be still be used. DO NOT connect any equipment, such as an SWR or power meter, between the transceiver and preampli-

er. In such case, the preamplier may not function correctly. This item appears only when the optional UX-9100 is installed.

48.

Select the audio output method when the optional external speakers are connected to both [EXT-SP

(MAIN)] and [EXT-SP (SUB)] jacks.

separately sent to the [EXT-SP (MAIN)]

and [EXT-SP (SUB)] jacks.

combined and sent to both the [EXT-SP

(MAIN)] and [EXT-SP (SUB)] jacks.

49.

Select the audio output method when headphones are connected to the transceiver.

separately sent to the right speaker

(MAIN Band) and left speaker (SUB Band).

combined, and sent to both the right and left speakers.

MAIN and SUB Band audio are sepa-

rately sent to the right speaker (MAIN Band) and left speaker (SUB Band). When the SUB Band is not displayed, the MAIN Band audio is sent to both the left and right speakers. SET MODE 14

50.

Turn the SUB Band Audio Mute function ON or OFF. While transmitting, the SUB band audio is muted when this function is turned ON.

while transmitting.

speaker, is muted while transmit-

ting.

speaker and USB port, is muted while transmitting.

51.

Set the [ACC] sockets pin 12 (AF) and pin 13 (SQLS) output usage.

squelch.

squelch.

52.

Set the [DATA2] sockets pin 4 (DATA), pin 5 (AF) and pin 6 (SQL) output usage.

squelch.

squelch.

53.

Set the [ACC] sockets pin 7 (VSEND) and pin 3

(HSEND) output usage.

HSEND is used for all bands.

1200 MHz bands. HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz and 144 MHz bands.

430 MHz, and 1200 MHz bands. HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz bands. 14 166 14 SET MODE

Set mode description (Continued)

54.

Turn the external keypad ON or OFF for keyer mem-

ory transmission. DATA MOD 59.

Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation input in the data mode. See page 26 for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection.

-

tion.

-

ternal keypad switches transmits the desired keyer memory contents.

55.

Select whether or not to output the audio from the

[USB] connector on the rear panel, according to the squelch state. The same audio signals are sent from the [USB] con-

nector and the [ACC] sockets.

- The beep tones and the voice synthesizer announce-

ments are not sent.

- The received audio output level cannot be adjusted with the [AF] control.

regardless of the squelch state.

squelch is open.

56.

Set the input modulation level of the [USB] connector

57.

Turn the [DATA2] sockets 9600 bps data transmission ON or OFF.

-

mission.

DATA OFF MOD 58.

Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation input in the data OFF mode.

(pin 11).

167

(pin 11).

60.

Set the CI-V data transfer rate between 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps and Auto. When Auto is selected, the baud rate is automatically set according to the data rate of the connected con-

troller. CI-V Address 61.

To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code. The IC-9100s address is 7Ch. When 2 or more IC-9100s are connected to an op-

tional CT-17 CI-V level converter, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

is 01h to DFh.

62.

Turn the transceive function using the CI-V system ON or OFF. When this item is set to ON, changing the frequency, operating mode, etc. on the IC-9100 automatically changes those settings on other Icom transceivers or receivers, and vice versa.

63.

Two COM port numbers are assigned to the [USB]

connector. One of them is USB1, used for cloning and CI-V operation. The other one is USB2, and the function is selected by this item.

: USB2 is not used.

-----

GPS, and DATA1 USB2 is selected as the GPS Out items option, as described below, USB2 will be used for the low-speed data input and GPS data output. SET MODE 14

64. Select the function of the [DATA1] jack.

: The [DATA1] jack is not used.

-----

position data input. GPS Out 65.

When a GPS receiver is connected to the [DATA1]

jack, the GPS position data is input through the jack.

the COM port (USB2). NOTE:-----

or DVdat is selected as the USB2/DATA1 Func

(63) option, and GPS is selected as the USB2/

DATA1 Func (64) option.

USB2 : Sends the GPS position data from

the COM port (USB2).

66.

Set the DV or GPS data transfer speed to 4800 or 9600 bps.

67.

4800, 9600 or 19200 bps.

68.

Use as a simple frequency check of the transceiver. See page 179 for calibration procedure. NOTE: Turn OFF the calibration marker after check-

ing the frequency of the transceiver.

REF Adjust 69. During frequency calibration, set the internal refer-

steps. NOTE: The default setting is different for each transceiver. 14 168 14 SET MODE

D The q Push [MENU] one or more times to display the M2 screen (Menu 2). w Push [TCON](F-4) to enter the Tone control Set mode. e Push a mode switch to select the desired operating mode. r Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select the desired item.

-

ating mode. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired option.

-

ting, if desired. y Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode.

[]

[]

[]

[F-3] [TCON]

[MENU]

Mode switches

[MAIN DIAL]

Displays the Set mode item name and number Displays the selected operating mode TCON R X H P F L P F S S B 1

[ ]

Displays the option Select the item Reset to the default setting

4.

First select the operating mode, then set the receive audio treble level to between 5 and +5.

5.

First select the operating mode, then set the transmit audio bass level to between 5 and +5.

6.

First select the operating mode, then set the transmit audio treble level to between 5 and +5.

7.

Set the lower cut-off frequency of the transmission passband width for your wide setting to 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz.

8.

Set the higher cut-off frequency of the transmission passband width for your wide setting to 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz.

RX HPF/LPF 1.

First select the operating mode, then set the receive audio high-pass lter to between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz in 100 Hz steps.

NOTE: When the receive audio high-pass and low-

pass lters are active, RX Bass and RX Treble items will be reset to the default value. RX HPF/LPF 2.

First select the operating mode, then set the receive audio low-pass lter to between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz in 100 Hz steps.

NOTE: When the receive audio high-pass and low-

pass lters are active, RX Bass and RX Treble items will be reset to the default value.

3.

First select the operating mode, then set the receive audio bass level to between 5 and +5.

169 15 DATA COMMUNICATION

D

TX AUDIO GND RX AUDIO SQL PTT TX AUDIO GND RX AUDIO SQL PTT q w DATA IN GND r y t e DATA OUT(9600bps) SQ*

AF OUT(1200bps) PTTP

TNC DATA IN GND q w r y t e DATA OUT(9600bps) SQ*

AF OUT(1200bps) PTTP Rear panel view D

Connect to the serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/

OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details.

* When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.). TNC RS-232C PC 13 9 10 11 765 1 2 3 12 8 4 FSKK AF OUT GND SEND*

TNC 13 9 10 11 765 1 2 3 12 8 4 FSKK AF OUT GND SEND*

Rear panel view RTTY OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT GND PTT Connect to the serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack or line IN/

OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details.

* e HF/50 MHz

: HSEND u 144/430/1200 MHz : VSEND RTTY OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT GND PTT RS-232C PC

TNC D

1 2 3 8 4 7 6 5 q i u y t*1 r*2 Rear panel view q u i t AUDIO OUTPUT GND AF INPUT PTT

TNC q u i t y r AFSK OUTPUT AF INPUT PTT GND SQL INPUT 171

*1 When using the VOX function, no connection is needed. Refer to the instruction manual of the external equipment.

*2 When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual. Connect to the serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/

OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details. TNC RS-232C PC DATA COMMUNICATION 15

[SSB]

[AM/FM]

[MAIN DIAL]

Appears when the FM data mode is selected.

Before operating packet (AFSK), be sure to consult the operating manual that came with your TNC. q Connect the TNC and PC. (p. 171) w Select the desired band. (p. 35) e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desired oper-

ating mode. (p. 43) r Hold down the same key you pushed in step e to select the Data mode. t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired fre-

quency. y Transmit your AFSK signals using your PCs key-

board.

-

ted signal is indicated on the Po meter.

-

put power so that the ALC meter reading stays in the ALC zone. NOTE: When connecting the TNC to the ACC socket on the rear panel, select the USB, LSB, AM and FM data mode, or disconnect the microphone and ro-

tate [MIC GAIN] fully counterclockwise. When the SSB data mode is selected, the audio input from the [MIC] connector is automatically cut, and the audio input from the [ACC] socket is used. Also, when the SSB data mode is selected, the xed

Fixed to the default

)

D When operating AFSK in the SSB mode, the displayed frequency is the signals carrier point.

LSB/LSB data mode Mark freq.: 2125 Hz Shift freq.: 200 Hz 2325 Hz 200 Hz 2125 Hz Carrier point

(Displayed frequency) 15 172

[] []

[MENU]

[MAIN DIAL]

SET 9 6 0 0 b p s M o d e 57 O F F OFF (default) 15 DATA COMMUNICATION

In the FM data mode, the transceiver can be set to a maximum data speed of 9600 bps. q Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. w Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select 9600bps Mode. e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn the 9600 bps mode ON

or OFF.

This is used for only regular audio or slower data transmission. r Push [MENU] to save and exit the Set mode.

When the data transmission speed is set to 9600 bps, the data signal coming from the TNC is applied exclu-

sively to the internal limiter circuitry to automatically maintain band width. NEVER apply data levels from the TNC of over 0.6 Vp-p. Otherwise the transceiver will not be able to maintain the band width, and your transmitted signal may possibly interfere with other stations. D When using a level meter or synchroscope, adjust the TX audio output level (DATA IN level) from the TNC as follows. 0.4 Vp-p (0.2 Vrms) 0.20.5Vp-p (0.10.25 Vrms) : acceptable level

: recommended level D q Connect the TNC to the transceiver. (p. 171) w Enter a test mode (CAL, etc.) on the TNC, then transmit some test data. e If the transceiver fails to transmit the test data, or transmits sporadically, (TX/RX indicator doesnt light or it ashes):

- Decrease the TNC output level until the transmit indicator lights continuously. If transmission is not successful, even though the TX indicator lights continuously:

- Increase the TNC output level. INFORMATION!

USB2/DATA1 Func (63) item option in decode signal. In this case, you must connect a USB cable* between the transceivers USB port on the rear panel and the PC. (p. 167)

*Purchase separately

URL: http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html). 173 OPTION INSTALLATION 16

Icom strongly suggests that the customer have their dealer or Icom distributor, for a reasonable fee, in-

stall Icom options at the time of the order. Icom un-

derstands that even the simplest of installations de-

mands the judgment of a trained Icom technician. Therefore, Icom will not be responsible for damage to the optional unit, or subsequent damage to the transceiver due to user installation problems. The options or the transceivers Warranty can be voided in such situations, at the sole judgment of Icom. For those customers who still wish to install their own options, knowing the risks and possible con-

sequences, the following information is provided for information purposes only. The following are instructions for removing the covers of the IC-9100. R WARNING! Turn OFF the power and disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver before per-

forming any work on the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock and/or equipment damage. q Remove the two screws from the carrying handle and remove it from the transceiver. w Remove the seven screws from the top of the trans-

ceiver and the six screws from the sides, then lift up the top cover. e Turn the transceiver upside-down.

when you turn the transceiver upside down. This may dam-

age them, or cause you to drop the transceiver. r Remove the six screws from the bottom, and then lift off the bottom cover.

About the leg pads To detach the leg pads from the right side panel of the top/bottom cover, push them out from the inside of each cover, after completing steps q through r above. Carrying handle Top cover PA shielding plate 16 Bottom cover 174 Top Rear Front Bottom 16 OPTION INSTALLATION

UX-9100 1200 MHz BAND UNIT The optional UX-9100 is required to operate on the 1200 MHz frequency band. q Remove the top and bottom covers as shown in the diagram on page 174. w Remove the antenna plate from the chassis on the rear panel using a standard at screwdriver. R WARNING! NEVER push on the antenna plate using your nger to remove it. This may cause an injury. e Connect the DC power cable, coaxial cables and at cable, as shown to the right.

Connect the longer coaxial cable from the trans-

ceiver to J12, and the other one, with a white mark near the connector, to J101 on the IF unit.

Connect the coaxial cable from the UX-9100s main unit to J11 on the IF unit.

Ensure the at cable is connected to the IF unit correctly, and not upside down. After connecting, fold the cable, but not too tightly, as illustrated to the right. Coaxial cable

(from the UX-9100) DC power cable Coaxial cable

(from the transceiver) 12-pin 11-pin 9-pin White mark IF unit Flat cable After connect-

ing, the cable like this. fold UX-9100 Antenna plate Bottom Front Rear Top r Connect the 9-pin connector from the transceivers front unit to J3 on the IF unit. t Connect the 12-pin connector from the IF unit to J1, and the 11-pin connector to J2 on the transceivers front unit. IF unit y Attach the UX-9100 and IF unit using the eight sup-

plied screws.

9100 is installed. u Return the top and bottom covers to their original positions. R WARNING! When UX-9100 is installed, the unit continues to draw current, even when the trans-

ceiver is turned OFF. Therefore, when you dont in-

tend to use the transceiver for a long period of time, disconnect the transceivers DC power cable. 175 Secure the coaxial cable, con-

necting to J12 on the IF unit, by the clip, as shown here. IF unit UX-9100 OPTION INSTALLATION 16 FL-430 (6 kHz) Bottom Front Rear Top

FL-430/FL-431 1ST IF FILTER The optional Roofing Filters, FL-430 1ST IF FILTER

(6 kHz) or FL-431 1ST IF FILTER (3 kHz) provides 6 or 3 kHz ltering to reduce interference from strong nearby signals. FL-431 (3 kHz) q Remove the top and bottom covers as shown on page 174. w Install the FL-430 or FL-431 as shown to the right.

-

propriate lter.

e Return the top and bottom covers to the original po-

sitions.

UT-121 DIGITAL UNIT The optional UT-121 DIGITAL UNIT is required for DV mode operation, including the DR mode. q Remove the top and bottom covers as shown on page 174. w Remove the upper two screws from the front panel

(q). e Loosen the lower two screws on the front panel

(w), then slowly fold down the front panel in the direction of the arrow (e). r Remove the protective paper from one side of the double sided adhesive sheet (r), then place the sheet on the panel, as shown below. (t). t Remove the other side of the protective paper, and install the UT-121 as shown below (y). y Return the front panel, top and bottom covers to their original positions. q Remove w Loosen t r q Remove w Loosen y e UT-121 Bottom Rear Front Top 16 176 17 MAINTENANCE

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions. If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem, or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center. D

SOLUTION REF. Power does not turn ON when the [POWER] switch is pushed.

p. 27 p. 180 an equivalent fuse.

( Fuses are installed in the DC power cable and in the internal PA unit.) D

No sound from the speaker.

SOLUTION REF.

suitable listening level.

-

tion to open the squelch. p. 45 p. 44

p. 46 SEND line of an external unit, if connected. Sensitivity is too low, and only strong signals are au-

dible.

p. 158 frequency.

p. 159 tune the antenna.

p. 71 ATT OFF. Received audio is unclear or distorted.

p. 43 p. 75

p. 76 the function. strong signal.

reamplier is turned ON.

and the [NR] control is too far clockwise.

turned ON.

p. 71 OFF the function.

p. 77

p. 163 Manual in the Set mode.

-

p. 37 lected ham band. ham band.

function Transmitting is impossible.

Output power is too low.

-

terclockwise

-

clockwise

No contact can be made with another station.

TX function is turned ON.

turned ON. Transmit signal is unclear or distorted. Repeater cannot be ac-

cessed.

-

wise.

AM cannot be selected. Transmitting is impossible in AM.

wrong.

144/430/1200 MHz frequency band is se-

lected.

p. 46

-

p. 46 tion.

p. 158 frequency.

tune the antenna.

TX] to turn OFF the function.

screen) to turn OFF the function. p. 159 pp. 69, 81 pp. 65, 82

-

p. 46 tion.

pp. 65, 82 screen) to turn ON the function.

p. 65

Select the HF/50/144/430 MHz frequency band. pp. 43, 61

Select the HF/50 MHz frequency band. pp. 43, 46 177 MAINTENANCE 17 D

Programmed scan does not stop. Programmed scan does not start.

SOLUTION

point.

The same frequencies have been programmed into both 1A3A and 1b3b of the scan edge memory channels.

1A3A and 1b3b scan edge memory channels. REF. pp. 44, 146 p. 148 Memory scan does not start.

p. 140 programmed. Select memory scan does not start. Mode select memory scan does not start. F scan does not start.

p. 151 designated as select channels. select channels for the scan.

p. 43 have not been programmed.

F scan is not pro-

grammed. the desired operating mode.

F scan. p. 152 D

The displayed frequency does not change properly.

turned ON.

SOLUTION REF.

p. 77 turn OFF the function.

[MENU] to exit the Set Mode.

p. 161 p. 181 17 178 17 MAINTENANCE

A very accurate frequency counter is required to cali-

brate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta-

tion WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sig-

nals. CAUTION: The IC-9100 has been thoroughly ad-

justed and tested at the factory before being

q Push [SSB] to select the USB mode. w Push [PBT-CLR] for 1 second to clear the PBT set-

tings and make sure that the RIT/TX function is not turned ON. e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station

minus 1 kHz.

When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.000.00 MHz) as a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for 14.999.00 MHz.

r Hold down [MENU] for 1 second to enter the Set mode. t Push [Y](F-1) or [Z](F-2) to select Calibration Marker. y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn ON the calibration marker.

u Push [Z](F-2) to select REF Adjust. i Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust for a zero beat with the received standard signal.

frequency, resulting in a single tone being heard. o Push [Y](F-1) to select Calibration Marker.

!0 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to turn OFF the calibration marker.

!1 Push [MENU] to save, and exit the Set mode.

[]

(MAIN Band)

[]

(MAIN Band)

[]

[]

[PBT-CLR]

[]

[]

[MAIN DIAL]

[]

[]

SET C a l i b r a t i o n M a r k e r 68 O F F

SET R E F A d j u s t 69 5 0 %

The tuning tension of [MAIN DIAL] may be adjusted to suit your preference. The tension adjustment is located on the bottom side of the front panel. See the gure to the right. Slide the tension adjustment to a comfortable level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in one direction. MAIN DIAL Tuning tension adjustment Light Firm 179

If a fuse blows, or the transceiver stops functioning, nd the source of the problem, and repair it. Then re-

place the damaged fuse with a new, adequately rated fuse. R WARNING! Turn OFF the power and disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver before per-

forming any work on the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock, equipment dam-

age and/or re infury. D Refer the gure described to the right for the DC power cable fuse replacement. D Except for the power amplier, the 13.8 V DC from the DC power cable is applied to all units in the IC-9100, through the circuitry fuse. This fuse is located in the PA unit. q Remove the top cover. (p. 174) w Remove the 22 screws, then remove the PA shield-

ing plate as shown to the right. e Remove the speaker cable from the connector on the PA unit as shown to the right. r Replace the circuitry fuse as shown in the diagram to the right. t Replace the speaker cable, PA shielding plate, top cover and screws to their original position. CAUTION: DO NOT pull the speaker cable when removing the PA shielding plate, or DO NOT put the speaker cable under the PA shielding plate when replacing it. This could damage the transceiver. MAINTENANCE 17 The IC-9100 has two fuse types installed for trans-

ceiver protection.

.............................. ATC 30 A

.............................................. ATC 5 A ATC 30 A fuse Connector PA shielding plate Speaker cable ATC 5 A fuse 17 180 17 MAINTENANCE

D If you want to reset the operating parameters to their default values (VFO frequency, VFO settings, menu groups contents) without clearing certain data as de-

scribed below, a partial reset can be performed. The following data will not be cleared when doing a Partial reset:

q First, turn OFF the transceiver power. w While holding down [F-INP ENT] and [VFO/MEMO], push [POWER] to turn ON the power.

RESET, then its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete.

disappears, the resetting will be cancelled. e If desired, edit the Set mode settings after reset-

ting. D The display may occasionally display erroneous infor-

mation (e.g. when rst applying power). This may be caused externally by static electricity or by other fac-

tors. If this problem occurs, turn OFF the power. After wait-

ing a few seconds, turn ON the power again. If the problem persists, perform the following procedure. NOTE: Resetting the CPU CLEARS all programmed contents and returns them to their default settings. q First, turn OFF the transceiver power. w While holding down [F-INP ENT] and [M-CLR], push [POWER] to turn ON the power.

then when resetting is complete, then displays the initial VFO frequencies.

-

appears, the resetting will be cancelled. e After resetting, edit the Set mode settings, if de-

sired. 181

[POWER]

[VFO/MEMO]

[F-INP ENT]

[POWER]

[F-INP ENT] [M-CLR]

D The IC-9100 has transceiver-to-transceiver data clon-

ing capability. This function is useful when you want to copy all of the programmed contents from one IC-9100 to another.

q Connect a mini plug cable to the [REMOTE] jack of

the master and sub transceivers.

transceiver. w While holding down [F-1] on the sub transceiver, push [POWER] to turn ON the power and enter the cloning mode.

While holding down [F-2] on the master transceiver, push [POWER] to turn ON the power and enter the cloning mode.

standby mode.

-

cate it as the master transceiver.

MAINTENANCE 17

[REMOTE]

Mini plug cable

(Purchase separately) Use as short a mini plug cable as possible. Depending on the length of the cable, data cloning cannot be done. e Push [OUT](F-5) on the master transceiver.

-

play, and the bar meter shows that data is being trans-

ferred to the sub-transceiver.

-

ceivers display, and the bar meter shows that data is being received from the master transceiver.

r When cloning is nished, turn power OFF, then ON

again to exit the cloning mode.

-

ceivers display after the cloning is completed. D The optional CS-9100 CLONING SOFTWARE is also available to clone/edit contents with a PC using ICF format les. Microsoft Windows XP (32bit), Windows Vista (32/64bit) or Windows 7 (32/64bit) OS is required.

PC. (Purchase separately)

[USB]

PC USB cable

(Purchase separately) 17 182 18 CONTROL COMMAND

D The transceiver can be connected through an optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V

(CI-V) controls the transceiver. Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be connected to the PC. See p. 167 for setting the CI-V condition using the set mode. 915V DC RS-232C cable PC ct-17 IC-9100 mini-plug cable When the transceiver is connected to a PC with the USB cable (purchased separately), the optional CT-17 is not required. D The CI-V system can be operated using the following data formats. Data formats differ depending on com-

mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added to some commands. Controller to IC-9100 OK message to controller q w FE FE 7C e E0 r Cn t Sc y Data area u FD FE FE E0 7C FB FD

) n o i t l e b m a e r P

) d e x i f

(

e d o c i s r e v e c s n a r T s s e r d d a t l u a f e d s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l u a f e d r e b m u n d n a m m o C l

) e b a t d n a m m o c e h t e e s

(

r e b m u n d n a m m o c b u S l

) e b a t d n a m m o c e h t e e s

(

s a h c u s a t a d e d o c D C B y r o m e m

, y c n e u q e r f r o f y r t n e r e b m u n p i r c s e d t n e t n o c a t a d e h t e e s

(

e g a s s e m f o d n E

) d e x i f

(

e d o c l e b m a e r P

) d e x i f

(

e d o c s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l f u a e d i s r e v e c s n a r T s s e r d d a t l u a f e d

) d e x i f

(

e d o c K O e d o c G N

) d e x i f

(

e g a s s e m f o d n E

) d e x i f

(

e d o c FE FE E0 q w 7C e Cn r Sc t Data area y FD u FE FE E0 7C FA FD IC-9100 to controller NG message to controller 183 D Cmd. Sub cmd.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F see p. 190 Send operating frequency for transceive see p. 190 Send operating mode for transceive see p. 191 Read band edge frequencies see p. 190 Read operating frequency see p. 190 Read operating mode see p. 190 Send operating frequency see p. 190 Send operating mode Select VFO mode Select VFO A Select VFO B Equalize VFO A and VFO B Or, equalize MAIN and SUB Bands Exchange VFO A and VFO B Or, exchange MAIN and SUB Bands Select MAIN Band Select SUB Band Select Memory mode Select Memory channel

Select Call channel 0001 to 0105 0106 00 to 19 Select Satellite Memory channel

M-CH19) Memory write Memory copy to VFO Memory clear Read offset frequency Send offset frequency Scan stop Programmed/memory scan start Programmed scan start F scan start Fine programmed scan start Fine F scan start Memory scan start Select memory scan start Mode select scan start Set F scan span 5 kHz Set F scan span 10 kHz Set F scan span 20 kHz Set F scan span 50 kHz Set F scan span 100 kHz Set F scan span 500 kHz Set F scan span 1 MHz Set as non-select channel Set as select channel

( The previously set number by CI-V is set after turning power ON, or 1 is selected if no selection is performed.) Set scan resume OFF Set scan resume ON Read Split function or duplex setting Set the Split function OFF Set the Split function ON Set simplex operation Set DUP operation Set +DUP operation 00 01 A0 B0 D0 D1 00 01 02 03 12 13 22 23 24 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 B0 B1 D0 D3 00 01 10 11 12 CONTROL COMMAND 18

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 00 20 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0015 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255

Send/read the tuning step 10 Hz (1 Hz) Send/read the tuning step 100 Hz Send/read the tuning step 1 kHz Send/read the tuning stepd 5 kHz Send/read the tuning step 6.25 kHz Send/read the tuning step 9 kHz Send/read the tuning step 10 kHz Send/read the tuning step 12.5 kHz Send/read the tuning step 20 kHz Send/read the tuning step 25 kHz Send/read the tuning step 50 kHz Send/read the tuning step 100 kHz Send/read the tuning step 1 MHz (except for HF/50 MHz band) Send/read attenuator OFF Send/read 20 dB attenuator Send/read ANT1 selection Send/read ANT2 selection Announce operating frequency, operating mode and S-meter level with voice syn-

thesizer Announce operating frequency and S-

meter level with voice synthesizer Announce operating mode with voice syn-

thesizer Send/read [AF] position

Send/read [RF/SQL] position (RF gain level)

Send/read [RF/SQL] position (squelch level)

Send/read [NR] position

Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position

Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position

Send/read [CW PITCH] position

Send/read [RF POWER] position

Send/read [MIC GAIN] position

Send/read [NOTCH] position

Send/read COMP level

Send/read Break-IN Delay setting

Send/read NB level

Send/read Monitor gain

Send/read VOX gain

Send/read Anti VOX gain

Send/read CONTRAST level

Send/read BRIGHT level

Cmd. Sub cmd. 10 11 12 13 14 00 01 00 01 02 01 02 03 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 12 15 16 17 18 19 18 184

Cmd. Sub cmd. 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. 15 16 01 02 11 12 13 14 02 12 22 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 4A 4B 4C 4F 50 55 56 57 58

00 01 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 00 01 02 01 02 03 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 185 Read squelch status (squelch close) Read squelch status (squelch open) Read S-meter level

Read RF power meter

Read SWR meter

Read ALC meter

Read COMP meter

Send/read Preamp OFF Send/read Preamp ON (144/430/1200 MHz) Send/read Preamp 1 ON (HF/50 MHz) Send/read Preamp 2 ON (HF/50 MHz) Send/read AGC FAST Send/read AGC MID Send/read AGC SLOW Send/read Noise Blanker OFF Send/read Noise Blanker ON Send/read Noise Reduction OFF Send/read Noise Reduction ON Send/read Auto Notch function OFF Send/read Auto Notch function ON Send/read Repeater tone OFF Send/read Repeater tone ON Send/read Tone squelch OFF Send/read Tone squelch ON Send/read Speech compressor OFF Send/read Speech compressor ON Send/read Monitor function OFF Send/read Monitor function ON Send/read VOX function OFF Send/read VOX function ON Send/read BK-IN function OFF Send/read Semi BK-IN function ON Send/read Fill BK-IN function ON Send/read Manual notch function OFF Send/read Manual notch function ON Send/read AFC function OFF Send/read AFC function ON Send/read DTCS OFF Send/read DTCS ON Send/read VSC function OFF Send/read VSC function ON Send/read Twin Peak Filter OFF Send/read Twin Peak Filter ON Send/read Dial lock function OFF Send/read Dial lock function ON Send/read 1st IF lter 3 kHz Send/read 1st IF lter 6 kHz Send/read 1st IF lter 15 kHz Send/read DSP lter type SHARP Send/read DSP lter type SOFT Send/read manual notch width WIDE Send/read manual notch width MID Send/read manual notch width NAR Send/read SSB transmit bandwidth WIDE Send/read SSB transmit bandwidth MID Send/read SSB transmit bandwidth NAR 16 17 19 1A 59 5A 5B 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014

00 01 00 01 00 01 02

Send/read Sub band OFF Send/read Sub band ON Send/read Satellite mode OFF Send/read Satellite mode ON Send/read DSQL/CSQL OFF (DV mode only) Send/read DSQL ON (DV mode only) Send/read CSQL ON (DV mode only) see p. 191 Send CW messages Read the transceiver ID see p. 195 Send/read memory contents see p. 191 Send/read band stacking register con-

tents see p. 191 Send/read memory keyer contents*1 00 to 49 Send/read the selected lter width

00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time constant

Send/read LCD contrast level

Send/read LCD backlight brightness level

Send/read beep level

Send/read beep level limit OFF Send/read beep level limit ON Send/read conrmation beep OFF Send/read conrmation beep ON Send/read band edge beep OFF Send/read band edge beep ON

(Beep sounds with a default band) Send/read band edge beep with user set-

ting ON Send/read band edge beep with user set-

ting/TX limit ON Send/read beep audio frequency for MAIN Band

Send/read beep audio frequency for SUB Band

Send/read Auto selection for [RF/SQL]

Send/read SQL selection for [RF/SQL]

Send/read RF+SQL selection for [RF/SQL]

Send/read Meter Peak Hold function OFF Send/read Meter Peak Hold function ON Send/read FM/DV Center Error function OFF Send/read FM/DV Center Error function ON Send/read Time-Out Timer OFF Send/read 3 min. Time-Out Timer Send/read 5 min. Time-Out Timer Send/read 10 min. Time-Out Timer Send/read 20 min. Time-Out Timer Send/read 30 min. Time-Out Timer Send/read PTT Lock function OFF Send/read PTT Lock function ON Send/read Quick Split function OFF Send/read Quick Split function ON 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 0050 to 0200 0050 to 0200 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 00 01 00 01 0015 see p. 192 Send/read Split offset frequency Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0016 1A

00 01

Send/read Split Lock function OFF Send/read Split Lock function ON 0017 see p. 192 Send/read Duplex offset frequency 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 0023 0024 0000 to 0255 00 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 Send/read One Touch Repeater DUP Send/read One Touch Repeater DUP+

Send/read Auto Repeater OFF Send/read Auto Repeater ON-1 (for USA version) or ON (for Korea version) Send/read Auto Repeater ON-2 (for USA version) Send/read Tuner Auto Start OFF Send/read Tuner Auto Start ON Send/read PTT Tune OFF Send/read PTT Tune ON Send/read antenna selection OFF Send/read manual antenna selection Send/read auto antenna selection Send/read voice synthesizer level

Send/read English selection for voice syn-

thesizer speech language Send/read Japanese selection for voice synthesizer speech language Send/read speech speed slow Send/read speech speed fast Send/read S-meter level announcement OFF Send/read S-meter level announcement ON Send/read operating mode announce-

ment (after pushing mode switch) OFF Send/read operating mode announce-

ment (after pushing mode switch) ON Send/read [SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting

Send/read [SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting

Send/read number of memo pad channels 5 Send/read number of memo pad channels 10 Send/read auto TS for [MAIN DIAL] OFF Send/read auto TS for [MAIN DIAL] Low Send/read auto TS for [MAIN DIAL] High Send/read Low selection for microphone Up/Down speed Send/read High selection for microphone Up/Down speed Send/read Quick RIT/TX clear OFF Send/read Quick RIT/TX clear ON Send/read AFC functioning range limit OFF Send/read AFC functioning range limit ON Send/read Auto Notch selection for SSB mode Send/read Manual notch selection for SSB mode Send/read Auto/Manual Notch selection for SSB mode Send/read Auto Notch selection for AM mode Send/read Manual Notch selection for AM mode Send/read Auto/Manual Notch selection for AM mode CONTROL COMMAND 18

Send/read Manual Notch lter width pop-

up OFF Send/read Manual Notch lter width pop-

up ON Send/read BW Popup (PBT) setting OFF Send/read BW Popup (PBT) setting ON Send/read BW Popup (FIL) setting OFF Send/read BW Popup (FIL) setting ON Send/read SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning function OFF Send/read SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning function ON Send/read LSB selection for CW normal side Send/read USB selection for CW normal side

keyer 1st menu

keyer 1st menu Send/read GPS-Root selection for GPS 1st Menu Send/read GPS-POS selection for GPS 1st Menu Send/read external preamplier (AG-25) control for 144 MHz band OFF Send/read external preamplier (AG-25) control for 144 MHz band ON Send/read external preamplier (AG-35) control for 430 MHz band OFF Send/read external preamplier (AG-35) control for 430 MHz band ON Send/read external preamplier (AG-

1200) control for 1200 MHz band OFF Send/read external preamplier (AG-

1200) control for 1200 MHz band ON Send/read Separate selection for the ex-

ternal speaker output method Send/read Mix selection for the external speaker output method Send/read Separate selection for the headphone audio output method Send/read Mix selection for the head-

phone audio output method Send/read Auto selection for the head-

phone audio output method Send/read SUB Band audio mute during transmit on the main band OFF Send/read SUB Band audio mute during transmit on the main band ON Send/read MAIN selection for the [ACC]

AF/SQL line output Send/read SUB selection for the [ACC]

AF/SQL line output Send/read MAIN selection for the [DATA]

AF/SQL line output Send/read SUB selection for the [DATA]

AF/SQL line output Send/read VSEND select OFF Send/read UHF Only selection for VSEND Send/read VSEND select ON Send/read external keypad OFF

external keypad Send/read USB audio squelch OFF

(OPEN) Send/read USB audio squelch ON Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0036 1A

00 0037 0038 0039 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 18 186 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0054 1A 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065

0000 to 0255 00 01 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 00 01 0000 to 0255

Send/read USB modulation level

Send/read 9600 bps mode OFF Send/read 9600 bps mode ON Send/read MIC selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode OFF Send/read ACC selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode OFF Send/read MIC+ACC selection for the modulation input during DATA mode OFF Send/read USB selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode OFF Send/read MIC selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode ON Send/read ACC selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode ON Send/read MIC+ACC selection for the modulation input during DATA mode ON Send/read USB selection for the modula-

tion input during DATA mode ON Send/read CI-V transceive OFF Send/read CI-V transceive ON Send/read no function selection for USB2 (COM port) function

(COM port) function Send/read DVdat selection for USB2

(COM port) function Send/read no function selection for

[DATA1] function

function Send/read DVdat selection for [DATA1]

function Send/read OFF selection for GPS Out Send/read DATA->USB2 selection for GPS Out Send/read 4800 bps selection for GPS position data transmission speed of

[DATA1]

Send/read 9600 bps selection for GPS position data transmission speed of

[DATA1]

Decode Baud rate

Decode Baud rate

Decode Baud rate

Decode Baud rate

Decode Baud rate Send/read Calibration marker OFF Send/read Calibration marker ON Send/read reference frequency

0066 00 to 10 Send/read COMP level

0067 see p. 192 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF setting 0068 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level

0069 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level

0070 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level

0071 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level

0072 see p. 192 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for WIDE 187 Cmd. Sub cmd.

1A 05 0073 see p. 192 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for MID 0074 see p. 192 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for NAR-

ROW 0075 see p. 192 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF setting 0076 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX tone (Bass) level

0077 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level

0078 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX tone (Bass) level

0079 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level

0080 see p. 192 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF setting 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX tone (Bass) level 0081

0082 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level

0083 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX tone (Bass) level

0084 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level

0085 see p. 192 Send/read DV RX HPF/LPF setting 0086 00 to 10 Send/read DV RX tone (Bass) level

0087 00 to 10 Send/read DV RX Tone (Treble) level

0088 00 to 10 Send/read DV TX tone (Bass) level

0089 00 to 10 Send/read DV TX Tone (Treble) level

0090 see p. 192 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF setting 0091 see p. 192 0092 00 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 0093 0094 0095 0096 0001 to 9999 0000 to 0255 00 01 Send/read Normal selection for contest number style Send/read 190 ANO selection for con-

test number style Send/read 190 ANT selection for con-

test number style Send/read 90 NO selection for con-

test number style Send/read 90 NT selection for contest number style Send/read M1 selection for count up trig-

ger channel Send/read M2 selection for count up trig-

ger channel Send/read M3 selection for count up trig-

ger channel Send/read M4 selection for count up trig-

ger channel Send/read present number

Send/read CW sidetone gain

Send/read CW sidetone gain limit OFF Send/read CW sidetone gain limit ON 0097 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time 0098 00 01

Send/read Normal selection for message display Send/read Message selection for mes-

sage display 0099 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio 0100

Send/read 2 msec. selection for CW Rise time Send/read 4 msec. selection for CW Rise time Send/read 6 msec. selection for CW Rise time Send/read 8 msec. selection for CW Rise time 00 01 02 03 Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0101 1A

00 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 0113 0000 to 0255

Send/read Normal selection for paddle polarity Send/read Reverse selection for paddle polarity Send/read Straight selection for keyer type Send/read BUG-Key selection for keyer type Send/read ELEC-Key selection for keyer type Send/read Mic. up/down keyer OFF Send/read Mic. up/down keyer ON

mark frequency

mark frequency

mark frequency

width

width

width

keying polarity

keying polarity

Send/read CR,LF,CR+LF selection for

decode new line code Send/read 2 lines selection for number of

Send/read 3 lines selection for number of

Send/read Scan speed Low Send/read Scan speed High Send/read Scan resume OFF Send/read Scan resume ON Send/read OFF selection for MAIN DIAL function during a scan Send/read Up/Down selection for MAIN DIAL function during a scan Send/read NB level (HF/50 MHz)

0114 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (HF/50 MHz) 0115 0116 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB width (HF/50 MHz)

Send/read NB level (144 MHz)

0117 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (144 MHz) 0118 0119 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB width (144 MHz)

Send/read NB level (430 MHz)

0120 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (430 MHz) 0121 0122 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB width (430 MHz)

Send/read NB level (1200 MHz)

0123 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (1200 MHz) 0124 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB width (1200 MHz)

Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0125 1A 0126 0127 0128 0129 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 CONTROL COMMAND 18

0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 Send/read VOX gain

Send/read ANTI-VOX gain

00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay time 00 01 02 03 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01

Send/read VOX voice delay OFF Send/read Short selection for VOX voice delay Send/read Mid selection for VOX voice delay Send/read Long selection for VOX voice delay Send/read BK-IN delay time

Send/read MONITOR gain

Send/read Standby Beep OFF Send/read ON-1 selection for Standby Beep Send/read ON-2 selection for Standby Beep Send/read Auto Reply OFF Send/read Auto Reply ON Send/read PTT selection for DV Data TX Send/read Auto selection for DV Data TX Send/read Auto selection for Digital Moni-

tor Send/read Digital selection for Digital Monitor Send/read Analog selection for Digital Monitor Send/read Digital RPT Set OFF Send/read Digital RPT Set ON Send/read RX Call Sign Auto Write OFF Send/read Auto selection for RX Call Sign Auto Write Send/read RX RPT Call Sign Auto Write OFF Send/read Auto selection for RX RPT Call Sign Auto Write Send/read DV Auto Detect OFF Send/read DV Auto Detect ON Send/read Call Sign Edit Record OFF Send/read Select selection for Call Sign Edit Record Send/read Auto selection for Call Sign Edit Record Send/read Gateway Auto Set OFF Send/read Auto selection for Gateway Auto Set Send/read ALL selection for RX Record

(RPT) Send/read Latest Only selection for RX Record (RPT) Send/read RX Call Sign Auto Display OFF Send/read Auto selection for RX Call Sign Auto Display Send/read TX Call Sign Display OFF Send/read UR selection for TX Call Sign Display

Display Send/read RX Message Display OFF Send/read Auto selection for RX Message Display Send/read Scrolling speed slow Send/read Scrolling speed fast 18 188 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0146 1A 0147 0148 0149 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154

00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 0000 to 0255 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01

Send/read DR Call Sign Popup OFF Send/read DR Call Sign Popup ON Send/read Opening Call Sign OFF Send/read Opening Call Sign ON Send/read BK function OFF Send/read BK function ON Send/read EMR mode OFF Send/read EMR mode ON Send/read EMR AF Level

Send/read 4800 bps selection for GPS Receiver Baud Send/read 9600 bps selection for GPS Receiver Baud Send/read dddmm.mm selection for Po-

sition Format Send/read dddmmss selection for Posi-

tion Format Send/read Meter selection for the display-

ing unit Send/read Feet/Mile selection for the dis-

playing unit Send/read North REF selection for com-

pass direction Send/read South REF selection for com-

pass direction 0155 see p. 192 Send/read UTC Offset 0156 00 01 00 01 Send/read GPS Indicator OFF Send/read GPS Indicator ON

input method

-

tion input method 0157 0158 see p. 192 Send/read my position information 0159 see p. 193 Send/read Alarm Area1 0160 00 Send/read Limited selection for Alarm Area2 Send/read Extended selection for Alarm Area2 Send/read Both selection for Alarm Area2 Send/read GPS Auto TX OFF Send/read 5 sec. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 10 sec. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 30 sec. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 1 min. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 3 min. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 5 min. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 10 min. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read 30 min. selection for GPS Auto TX interval Send/read Disable selection for GPS TX Mode Send/read GPS selection for GPS TX Mode Send/read GPS-A selection for GPS TX Mode Send/read GPS Sentence (RMC) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (RMC) ON Send/read GPS Sentence (GGA) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (GGA) ON 01 02 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 0161 0162 0163 0164 189 Cmd. Sub cmd. 05 0165 1A 0166 0167 0168

00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01

Send/read GPS Sentence (GLL) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (GLL) ON Send/read GPS Sentence (GSA) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (GSA) ON Send/read GPS Sentence (VTG) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (VTG) ON Send/read GPS Sentence (GSV) OFF Send/read GPS Sentence (GSV) ON 0169 see p. 193 Send/read Unproto Address 0170 00 01 0171 00 01 02 Send/read position data extension OFF Send/read Course/Speed selection for position data extension Send/read Time Stamp OFF Send/read DHM selection for Time Stamp Send/read HMS selection for Time Stamp 0172 00 to 16 Send/read GPS-A Symbol

0173 see p. 193 Send/read GPS-A Symbol Other 0174 00 to 16 Send/read GPS-A SSID

0175 see p. 193 Send/read Comment 0176 see p. 193 Send/read Comment (Extension) 0177 see p. 193 Send/read GPS TX Message 06 07 00 01 02 07 00 see p. 193 Send/read DATA mode selection see p. 196 Send/read Satellite memory contents see p. 193 Send/read Repeater tone frequency see p. 193 Send/read Tone squelch frequency see p. 193 Send/read DTCS code and polarity see p. 193 Send/read CSQL code (DV mode) 1B 1C 1E 1F 01 02 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 20 00 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 Send/read Transceivers status (RX) Send/read Transceivers status (TX) Send/read Antenna tuner OFF (through) Send/read Antenna tuner ON Send/read Manual tuning selection Send/read Transmit frequency monitor check OFF Send/read Transmit frequency monitor check ON Read number of available TX frequency band see p. 191 Read TX band edge frequencies Read number of user-set TX frequency band see p. 191 Send/read User-set TX band edge fre-

quencies see p. 193 see p. 194 Send/read DV TX call signs see p. 194 Send/read DV TX message 00*2 01*2 Send/read Auto DV RX Callsigns output OFF Send/read Auto DV RX Callsigns output ON see p. 194 Output DV RX Callsigns see p. 194 Read DV RX Callsigns 00*2 01*2 Send/read Auto DV RX message output OFF Send/read Auto DV RX message output ON 01 02 see p. 194 Output DV RX message see p. 194 Read DV RX message Cmd. Sub cmd. 00 20 02

00*2 01*2

Send/read Auto DV RX status output OFF Send/read Auto DV RX status output ON 01 02 see p. 194 Output DV RX status see p. 194 Read DV RX status

*1 The counter can be inserted into only one channel.

*2 Output setting is automatically turned OFF after turning the power OFF, then ON. CONTROL COMMAND 18 D

Command : 1A 00, 1A 05 0169, 1A 05 0173, 1A 05 0175, 1A 05 0176, 1A 05 0177, 1F 02, 20 0001, 20 0002, 20 0101, 20 0102

ASCII code ASCII code AZ 09 415A 3039 az Space

!

$

?

^

,

<

(

[

{

21 24 26 3F 27 5E 2D 2F 2C 3B 3C 28 5B 7B 7C 7E

#

"

`

+

.

:

>

)

]

}

_

@

617A 20 23 25 5C 22 60 2B 2A 2E 3A 3D 3E 29 5D 7D 5F 40

Command : 00, 03, 05 q w e r t X X X X X X X X X X 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H k 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H k 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H k 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H M 1 1 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 0 1 4 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 1

Command : 01, 04, 06 q w X X X X q w 00: LSB 01: USB 02: AM 03: CW

05: FM 07: CW-R 01: FIL1

02: FIL2 17: DV 03: FIL3 Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01 and 06. In that case, FIL1 is automatically selected with command 01, and the default lter setting of the operating mode is automatically selected with com-

mand 06. 18 190 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Data content description (continued)

Command 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03 q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 D X X X X X X X X X X 0 3 1 0

:

*

r e b m u n e g d E 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 1 1 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 1

) d e x i f

(

r o t a r a p e S 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 1 9 0

:

t i i g d z H 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 1 1 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 0 0 1 Lower edge Higher edge

* Edge number setting is not necessary with com-

mand 02.

Command : 1A 01 q w X X X X When sending the contents, the codes, such as op-

erating frequency and operating mode*, should be added after the register code, as shown below.

* See t to %1 on Memory content setting for details.

(p. 195) q Frequency band code Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1.8 3.5 7 10 14 18 21 24 28 50 VHF UHF 1.2G GENE 1.800000 1.999999 3.400000 4.099999 6.900000 7.499999 9.90000010.499999 13.90000014.499999 17.90000018.499999 20.90000021.499999 24.40000025.099999 28.00000029.999999 50.00000054.000000 108.000000174.000000 420.000000480.000000 1240.0000001320.000000 Other than above w Register code Code

01 02 03 1 (latest) 2 3 (oldest) For example, when reading the oldest contents in the 21 MHz band, the code 0703 is used. 191

Command : 1A 02 X X X X X X w&1: Text data q: Channel data 01 M1 02 M2 03 M3 04 M4

ASCII code

09 AZ az space

/

?

,

.

@

^

3039 415A 617A 20 2F 3F 2C 2E 40 5E 2A Number Alphabetical characters Alphabetical characters Word space Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol e.g., to send BT, enter ^BT Inserts contest number (can be used for 1 channel only)

Command : 17 Set a CW message of up to 30 characters.

ASCII code

09 AZ az space

/

?

.

,

:

(

)

+

@

3039 415A 617A 20 2F 3F 2E 2D 2C 3A 27 28 29 3D 2B 22 40 Number Alphabetical characters Alphabetical characters Word space Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol

FF stops sending CW messages.

^ is used to transmit a string of characters with no inter-character space. CONTROL COMMAND 18

Command : 1A 05 0015 q w e X 0 X X 0 X r XX

) d e x i f

(

0

:

t i g d z H 0 0 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d z H k 1 i 9 0

:

t i g d z H k 0 0 1 i 9 0

:

t i g d z H k 0 1

) d e x i f

(

0

:

t i g d z H M 0 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d z H M 1 n o i t c e r i d

+

:

0 0 n o i t c e r i d

:

1 0

:

n o i t c e r i D

Command : 1A 05 0067, 0075, 0080, 0085, 0090, 0091 X X X X LPF (upper side) HPF (lower side) HPF 00: through 01 to 20: 100 to 2000 Hz LPF 05 to 24: 500 to 2400 Hz 25: through

Command : 1A 05 0017 q w e X X X X X X Set the LPF value larger than HPF one.

Command : 1A 05 0155 q w X X X X e X X 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H k 0 1 9 0

:

*

t i g d i z H M 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i z H M 1

*10 MHz digit can be entered on only the 1200 MHz frequency band.

Command : 1A 05 0072, 0073, 0074 1 0

:

t i g d i r u o h 0 1 9 0

:

t i i g d r u o h 1 5 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 1 n o n o i t c e r i d

+

=

0 0 i t c e r i d

=

1 0 n o i t c e r i D

Command : 1A 05 0158 q X w e r t y u i o !0 !1 X X X X X X 0 0 X 0 X X X X X X X X 0 0 X X X Lower edge Higher edge Lower edge 0: 100Hz 1: 200Hz 2: 300Hz 3: 500Hz Higher edge 0: 2500Hz 1: 2700Hz 2: 2800Hz 3: 2900Hz 9 0 i

:

t i g d e e r g e d 0 1 i 9 0

:

t i g d e e r g e d 1 i 5 0

:

t i g d

. n m 0 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d

. n m 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d

. n m 1

. 0 i 9 0 i

:

t i g d

. n m 1 0

. 0 i 1 0

:

t i i g d e e r g e d 0 0 1 9 0 i

:

t i g d e e r g e d 0 1 i 9 0

:

t i g d e e r g e d 1 1

=

*

N

/

0

=

*

S

) d e x i f

(

0

) d e x i f

(

0

) d e x i f

(

0 9 0 i i

:

t i g d

. n m 1 0 0

. 0 i 5 0

:

t i g d

. n m 0 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d

. n m 1 i i 9 0

:

t i g d

. n m 1

. 0 i 9 0 i

:

t i g d

. n m 1 0

. 0 i 9 0 i i

:

t i g d

. n m 1 0 0

. 0 Latitude Longitude

*S: South latitude N: North latitude W: West longitude E: East longitude 1

=

*

E

/

0

=

*

W

) d e x i f

(

0

) d e x i f

(

0 18 192 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Data content description (continued)

Command : 1A 05 0159 q w e X X X X 0 0 5 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 0 1 9 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 1 9 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 1 9 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 1 0 9 0

:

t i g d i

. i n m 1 0 0

. 0

. 0

. 0

) d e x i f

(

0

Command : 1A 05 0169 Set an unproto address of up to 56 characters. See Character code setting for details. (p. 190)

Command : 1A 05 0173 X X X X Second digit First digit

character. See Character code setting for the second digit character. (p. 190)

Command : 1A 05 0175 Set a comment of up to 43 characters. See Character code setting for details. (p. 190)

Command : 1A 05 0176 Set a comment of up to 36 characters. See Character code setting for details. (p. 190)

Command : 1A 05 0177 Set a GPS message of up to 20 characters. See Character code setting for details. (p. 190)

Command : 1A 06 q w X X X X 00: Data mode OFF 01: FIL1 02: FIL2 03: FIL3 00: Data mode OFF 01: Data mode ON 193

Command : 1B 00, 1B 01 q*

0 0

) d e x i f

(

0

) d e x i f

(

0 w e X i t i g d z H 0 0 1 X i t i g d z H k 0 1 X X i t i g d z H 1 i t i g d z H 1

. 0

*Not necessary when setting a frequency.

Command : 1B 02 q w e X X 0 X

:

y t i r a o p l t i m s n a r T e s r e v e R l a m r o N

:

:

0 1 l

:

y t i r a o p e v e c e R i e s r e v e R l a m r o N

:

:

0 1 7 0

:

t i g d i t s r i F

) d e x i f

(

0 X 7 0

:

t i g d i d n o c e S X 7 0

:

t i g d i d r i h T

Command : 1B 07 q X X Second digit: 09 First digit: 09

Command : 1F 00 Set your own call sign and note of up to 12 charac-

ters. qi X X o!2 X X X X X X X X X X qi o!2 Note setting

Command : 1F 01 Set UR, R1 and R2 call signs of up to 8 characters. qi X X X X X X o!6 X X X X

!7@4 X X qi UR (Destination) call sign setting o!6 R1 (Access/Area repeater) call sign setting

!7@4 R2 (Link/Gateway repeater) call sign setting

ASCII code ASCII code 09 Space 3039 20 AZ 415A 2F

Command : 1F 02 Set the transmit message of up to 20 characters. See Character code setting for details. (p. 190) FF stops sending or reading messages.

Command : 20 0201, 20 0202

7 0 6 0/1

Receiving a voice call During receiving a digital voice signal, select 1.

( Regardless of DSQL and CSQL setting) 0/1 Last call nisher When the last call was nished 0/1 Receiving a sig-

nal 0/1 Receiving a BK call 0/1 Receiving a EMR call 0/1 Receiving a sig-

nal other than DV by you, select 1. When the audio tone can be heared, select 1. During receiving a BK call, se-

lect 1. During receiving a EMR call, select 1. When DV and FM are blink-

ing, select 1. 0/1 Packet loss status During displaying a packet loss 5 4 3 2 1 0

Command : 20 0101, 20 0102 q@0 X X X X X X

@1@8 X

@9#2 X X XX X q@0 RX message (up to 20 characters)

@1@8 Call sign of the calling station (up to 8 characters)

@9#2 Note of the calling station (up to 4 characters) See Character code setting for details. (p. 190) FF stands for no message receiving after turning ON the transceiver. CONTROL COMMAND 18

Command : 20 0001, 20 0002 qw XXX X e!0 X

!1!4 X X XX X X X X X

!5@2 X X

@3#0 X X X X X X

#1#8 X X q Header ag data (First byte)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

(xed) 0

(xed) 0

(xed) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

w Header ag data (Second byte)

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Repeater control Send auto acknowledge

(Not used) Request to re-transmit Send acknowledge Receive no reply Repeater disabled NULL e!0 Call sign of the calling station

(up to 8 characters)

!1!4 Note of the calling station

(up to 4 characters)

!5@2 Call sign of the station that was called

(up to 8 characters)

@3#0 Call sign of the access/area repeater (R1)

(up to 8 characters)

#1#8 Call sign of the link/gateway repeater (R2)

(up to 8 characters) See Character code setting for details. (p. 190) FF stands for no call sign receiving after turning ON the transceiver. 18 194 18 CONTROL COMMAND D Data content description (continued)

Command : 1A 00 q X X to r X we X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X

!0!1 !2

!3

!4

!5!7

!8@0 X X

@1@3 X X X X

@4 X X

@5@7 X X X X X X

@8#5

#6$3

$4%1 t%1 X X X X X X X X X X X X q Frequency band setting 00 : HF/50 MHz frequency band 01 : 144 MHz band frequency band 02 : 430 MHz band frequency band 03 : 1200 MHz band frequency band w, e Memory channel number 00010099 : Memory channel 0 to 99 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106

: Programmed scan edge 1A

: Programmed scan edge 1b

: Programmed scan edge 2A

: Programmed scan edge 2b

: Programmed scan edge 3A

: Programmed scan edge 3b

: Call channel r Split and Select memory settings r X X 0: Select memory OFF 1: Select memory ON 0: Split OFF 1: Split ON When the program channel is selected, both settings should be 0. When the Call channel is selected, the Select mem-

ory setting should be 0. to Operating frequency setting

!0, !1 Operating mode setting

!2 1 byte data (XX) 00: Data mode OFF 01: Data mode ON

!3 Duplex and Tone settings

!3 X X 0: OFF, 1: Tone 2: TSQL, 3: DTCS 0: Duplex OFF 1: Duplex, 2: + Duplex 195

%2^0 X X X X

!4 Digital squelch setting

!4 X 0 0: Digital squelch function OFF 1: Digital call sign squelch function ON (DSQL) 2: Digital code squelch function ON (CSQL)

!5!7 Repeater tone frequency setting

!8@0 Tone squelch frequency setting

@1@3 DTCS code setting

@4 Digital code squelch setting

@5@7 Duplex offset frequency setting

@8#5 Destination call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

#6$3 R1 (Access/Area repeater) call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

$4%1 R2 (Link/Gateway repeater) call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

%2^0 Memory name setting Up to 9 characters.

1A 00 command with the format as below clears the data of the selected memory channel. w, e r t or later : None

: Memory channel 0 to 99

: FF NOTE:

t%1 are stored in t%1.

t%1 is used for transmit.

into t%1 to match your transceiver. We recom-

mend that you set the same data as t%1. CONTROL COMMAND 18

Command : 1A 07 eu X X X X X X X X X 0 X X 0 X X X X X X io !0

!3!5 qw X X X X

!2

!1 X

!6!8 X X X X X X X X

!9@1 X X X X

@2 X X

@3#0

#1#8

#9$6 e$6 X X X X X X X X X X X X q, w Satellite memory channel number 00010099 : Satellite memory channel 00 to 19 eu Operating frequency setting

i, o Operating mode setting

!0 Data mode setting 1 byte data (XX) 00: Data mode OFF 01: Data mode ON

!1 Tone setting

!1 0 X 0: OFF 1: Tone 2: TSQL 3: DTCS

!2 Digital squelch setting

!4 X 0 0: Digital squelch function OFF 1: Digital call sign squelch function ON (DSQL) 2: Digital code squelch function ON (CSQL)

!3!5 Repeater tone frequency setting

!6!8 Tone squelch frequency setting

!9@1 DTCS code setting

@2 Digital code squelch setting

@3#0 Destination call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

#1#8 R1 (Access/Area repeater) call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

#9$6 R2 (Link/Gateway repeater) call sign setting

(up to 8 characters)

$7%5 X X X X

$7%5 Memory name setting Up to 9 characters.

NOTE:

e$6 are stored in e$6.

e$6 is used for the uplink frequency (transmit).

e$6 is used for the downlink frequency (re-

ceive). 18 196

(continuously adjustable) 19 SPECIFICATIONS 0.03060.000*1*2 136.000174.000*1*2 420.000480.000*1*2 1240.0001320.000 Transmit

Receive

3.5003.999*2, 1.8001.999*2, 5.33200*3, 5.34800*3, 5.35850*3, 5.37300*3, 5.40500*3, 7.0007.300*2, 14.00014.350*2, 21.00021.450*2, 28.00029.700*2, 144.000148.000*2, 1240.0001300.000

*1Some frequency bands are not guaranteed.

*2Depending on version.

*3USA version only. 10.10010.150*2, 18.06818.168*2, 24.89024.990*2, 50.00054.000*2 430.000450.000*2

DV

(99CH 3 band)

( 396CH with UX-910099CH 4 bands)

memory channels

: 18CH (6 3 band)

( 24CH with UX-91006CH 4 bands)

(1 3 band)

( 4CH with UX-91001CH 4 bands)

memory channels

3

: 20

( 50 impedance for HF/50 MHz and 144 MHz bands) Type-N 2

( 50 impedance for 430 MHz and 1200 MHz bands)

HF/50 MHz 144 MHz 430 MHz 1200 MHz 2 to 100 W (AM: 2 to 30 W)*

2 to 100 W 2 to 75 W 1 to 10 W

(at 13.8 V DC/+25C)

* In the AM mode, transmission can be performed only on the HF/50 MHz frequency band.

: Digital PSN modulation

: Digital Low power modulation

: Digital Phase modulation

: GMSK Digital Phase modulation

SSB AM FM DV

(Spurious domain) HF bands 50/144 MHz band 430 MHz band 1200 MHz band

(Out-of-band domain) HF bands

: Less than 40 dB 50/144/430 MHz band : Less than 60 dB 1200 MHz band

: Less than 50 dB

: Less than 50 dB

: Less than 63 dB

: Less than 61.8 dB

: Less than 53 dB suppression

: More than 55 dB

(1200 MHz: More than 40 dB)

: 9.999 kHz

TX variable range

3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (14)

3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (14)

(RCA)

(RCA)

Transmit Max. power Receive Standby Max. audio

(projections not included)

0C to +50C (+32F to +122F)

power ON.

+122F)

(negative ground)

: 24.0 A (HF/50/144/430 MHz band) 9.0 A (1200 MHz band)

: 3.0 A (HF/50/144/430 MHz band) 4.0 A (1200 MHz band)

: 4.5 A (HF/50/144/430 MHz band) 5.5 A (1200 MHz band)

315(W) 116(H) 343(D) mm 12516(W) 4916(H) 1312(D) in

(with UX-9100)

18) 197 The optional UX-9100 is required for 1200 MHz frequency band operation. When the 1200 MHz frequency band is selected. (The optional UX-9100 is required.) SPECIFICATIONS 19

HF/50/144/430 MHz band : Double superheterodyne system 1200 MHz band

: Triple superheterodyne system

1st

: 64.455 MHz (HF/50 MHz band) 10.850 MHz (144 MHz band) 71.250 MHz (430 MHz band) 243.950 MHz (1200 MHz band)

14)

(18)/8

(with 1 kHz single tone)

(noise rejection in SSB)

: 0.16 V (1.8029.99 MHz)*4

0.13 V (50.054.0 MHz)*5 2nd 3rd

SSB, CW AM (10 dB S/N)

FM (12 dB SINAD)

DV

: 36 kHz (HF/50/144/430 MHz) 10.950 MHz (1200 MHz)

: 36 kHz (1200 MHz) 0.11 V (144/430/1200 MHz)

: 12.6 V (0.51.799 MHz)*4 2.0 V (1.8029.99 MHz)*4 1.6 V (50.054.0 MHz)*5 1.4 V (144/430 MHz)

: 0.5 V (28.029.7 MHz)*4 0.32 V (50.054.0 MHz)*5 0.18 V (144/430/1200 MHz)

: 1.0 V (28.029.7 MHz)*4 0.63 V (50.054.0 MHz)*5 0.35 V (144/430/1200 MHz)

HF 50 MHz 144/430 MHz 1200 MHz

SSB : Less than 5.6 V*4 FM : Less than 0.3 V*4 SSB : Less than 5.6 V*5 FM : Less than 0.3 V*5 SSB : Less than 1.0 V FM : Less than 0.18 V SSB : Less than 1.0 V FM : Less than 0.18 V

*4 Pre-amp 1 is ON.

*5 Pre-amp 2 is ON.

(IF lter shape is set to SHARP.) SSB (BW: 2.4 kHz) CW (BW: 500 Hz)

AM (BW: 6 kHz) FM (BW: 15 kHz)

: More than 2.4 kHz/6 dB Less than 3.4 kHz/40 dB

: More than 500 Hz/6 dB Less than 700 Hz/40 dB

Less than 800 Hz/40 dB

: More than 6.0 kHz/6 dB Less than 10.0 kHz/40 dB

: More than 12.0 kHz/6 dB Less than 22.0 kHz/40 dB HF/50 MHz band*

DV (CH space: 12.5 kHz) : More than 50 dB

(at 13.8 V DC)

: More than 70 dB

*except IF through on 50 MHz band

: More than 60 dB

: More than 50 dB

distortion with an 8 load

144/430 MHz band 1200 MHz band

HF bands 50 MHz band

: 16.7 to 150 unbalanced

(Less than VSWR 1:3)

: 20 to 125 unbalanced

(Less than VSWR 1:2.5)

power

15 W (50MHz band )

(after tuning at RF power 100 W) Spurious signals may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceivers state (Tx or Rx). They are gener-

ated in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver mal-

function. All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation. 19 198 20 OPTIONS IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER Full-duty 1 kW linear amplifier including an automatic antenna tuner. Has auto-

matic tuning and band selection capability. Full break-in (QSK) operation is possi-

ble. The amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit can be separated. The optional OPC-599 ADAPTER CABLE is required for connection. Specially designed to tune a long wire antenna for the HF/50 MHz bands, particularly in portable or mobile oper-

ation. The PTT tune function pro-

vides simple operation.

PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY SP-23 EXTERNAL SPEAKER AH-2b ANTENNA ELEMENT

connect to 2 transceivers.

A 2.5 m long antenna ele-

ment for mobile operation with the AH-4.

754 MHz band with the AH-4 SP-21 EXTERNAL SPEAKER SM-30 DESKTOP MICROPHONE SM-50 DESKTOP MICROPHONE Designed for base station operation.

Unidirectional, electret microphone for base station operation. Includes a low cut switch and mic gain control. Unidirectional, dynamic microphone for base station operation. Includes [UP]/

[DOWN] switches, a low cut switch and mic gain control. HM-36 HAND MICROPHONE UX-9100 1200 MHz BAND UNIT FL-430 1ST IF FILTER (6 kHz) FL-431 1ST IF FILTER (3 kHz)

(Both lters are for HF/50 MHz Band) Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/

[DOWN] switches. The same as that attached with the transceiver. Allows you additional all mode oper-

ation on the 1200 MHz frequency band. The roong lters reduce interfer-

ence from strong nearby signals. 199 CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER UNIT For remote transceiver control using a personal computer equipped with an

-

quencies, operating mode, memory channels, etc., via your computer.

AG-25 WEATHER-PROOF PREAMPLIFIER (for 144 MHz Band)

AG-35 WEATHER-PROOF PREAMPLIFIER (for 430 MHz Band) External all-weather, mast mounting preampliers for com-

pensating for coaxial cable loss.

AG-2400 DOWN CONVERTER UNIT All-weather, satellite down converter with superior NF and gain. Input frequency Output frequency : 144146 MHz Conversion gain : More than 25 dB Total NF

: Less than 1.5 dB

: 24002402 MHz

OPC-1529R DATA COMMUNICATION CABLE (RS-232C type) Allows low-speed data communication in the DV mode, and receiving a GPS data from a third-party GPS receiver.

OPC-599 ADAPTER CABLE 13-pin, ACC connector to 7-pin + 8-pin ACC connector.

CARRYING HANDLE Convenient when carrying the transceiver. The same as that attached with the transceiver.

CS-9100 CLONING SOFTWARE Use this software to program settings, memory channels and set mode contents quickly and easily via your PCs USB port. A USB cable is required. (A-B type, purchase separately)

IP REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE To remotely control radios using the RS-BA1, that you comply with your local regulations. Approved Icom optional equipment is designed for optimal performance when used with an Icom trans-

ceiver. Icom is not responsible for the destruction or damage to an Icom transceiver in the event the Icom trans-

ceiver is used with equipment that is not manufac-

tured or approved by Icom. OPTIONS 20 20 200 21 CE INSTALLATION NOTES For amateur base station installations it is recom-

mended that the forward clearance in front of the an-

tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below the antenna array can be determined in most cases from the RF power at the antenna input terminals. As different exposure limits have been recommended for different frequencies, a relative table shows a guideline for installation considerations. Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specied in terms of V/m or A/m elds as they are likely to fall within the near-eld region. Similarly, the antennas may be physically short in terms of electrical length and that the installation will require some antenna matching device which can create local, high inten-

sity magnetic elds. Analysis of such MF installations is best considered in association with published guid-

ance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter installations. The EC recommended limits are almost identical to the FCC specied uncontrolled limits and tables exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for different antenna types for different frequency bands. Further information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.

Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-

diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically downwards is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical height of 1.8 m. The gures assume the worst case emission of a con-

stant carrier. For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power density limits have been recommended:

10400 MHz 2 W/sq m 435 MHz 2.2 W/sq m

Watts 102 m 70 cm 23 cm 13 cm and above 2 m 2.1 m 2.7 m 2.5 m 2.8 m 3.3 m 2.7 m 3.4 m 5 m 4.7 m 3.6 m 12 m 11.5 m 7.3 m 1 10 25 100 1000 2 m 2.3 m 2.5 m 3.2 m 6.3 m 2 m 201

Watts 102 m 70 cm 23 cm 13 cm and above 100 1,000 10,000 100,000 2 m 1.1 m 6 m 3.5 m 11 m 18 m 60 m 35 m 2 m 6.5 m 20 m 65 m 0.7 m 3 m 7 m 29 m In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-

mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-

mendation limits are specied as an average during 6 minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a timer circuit automatically cuts off the transmitter after 12 minutes etc. Similarly some modes of transmission, SSB, CW, AM etc. have a lower average output power and the as-

sessed risk is even lower. Versions of the IC-9100 which display the CE symbol on the serial number label, comply with the essential requirements of the European Radio and Telecommunica-

tion Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC. This warning symbol indicates that this equipment operates in non-harmonised frequency bands and/or may be subject to licensing conditions in the country of use. Be sure to check that you have the correct version of this radio or the correct program-

ming of this radio, to comply with national licensing requirement.

Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Czech Republic Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia AT BE BG HR CZ

DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV

Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United Kingdom 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Codes LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO SK SI ES SE CH TR GB CE 21 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Icom Inc. Japan 1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku Osaka 547-0003, Japan Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test Suite measurements have been performed. Kind of equipment:

HF/VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER Type-designation:

iC- 9100 Version (where applicable):

This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised standards, specifications or documents:

i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) EN 301 489-1 v1.6.1 (September 2005) EN 301 489-15 v1.2.1 (August 2002) EN 301 783-2 v1.1.1 (September 2000) EN 60950-1 2006 A11: 2009 Bad Soden Place and date of issue 11th Jan. 2011 Icom (Europe) GmbH Communication Equipment Auf der Krautweide 24, 65812 Bad Soden am Taunus, Germany Authorized representative name Y. Furukawa General Manager Signature

The use of IC-9100 (#03, #04,#05, #06, #11) in com-

bination with AG-25, AG-35 and/or AG-1200 pream-

pliers do not comply with the European Harmonised Standard regulations. Please do not use the IC-910H with these preampliers (AG-25, AG-35 and/or AG-

1200) intended for the US, Asian, Oceanian and Af-

rican markets. 21 202 IC-9100 #03

(Europe) IC-9100 #04

(Europe-1) IC-9100 #05

(Italy) IC-9100 #06

(Spain) IC-9100 #11

(France)

< Intended Country of Use >

AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG

< Intended Country of Use >

AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG

< Intended Country of Use >

AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG

< Intended Country of Use >

AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG

< Intended Country of Use >

AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG A-6871H-1EX Printed in Japan 2011 Icom Inc. 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Icom Inc. 1-6-19,Kamikuratsukuri, Hirano-ku,Osaka Japan. Phone : +81 6 6793 8424 Fax: +81 6 6793 3336 e-mail: world_support@icom.co.jp URL : http:/Avwww.icom.co.jp/world Date: January 11, 2011 To Whom It May Concern

| Subject: Authority to Act as an Agent Applicant: Icom Incorporated Product: Scanning receiver

| Model: IC-9100

: FCC ID: AFJ318300 Dear Sir/Madam, We hereby appoint UltraTech Engineering Labs Inc. (UltraTech) to act as our agent in preparation of this application for authorization of above equipment under F.C.C. Rules. We hereby certify that neither the application nor any party to the application is subject to a denial of Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862 because of a conviction for possession or distribution of a controlled substance. See 47 CRF 1.2002(b) for the definition of a party for these purposes. We also certify that the information provided, property describe the device or system for which authorization is required. Best regards Icom Incorporated Takayuki Watanabe General Manager of Quality Department

 

 

Icom Inc. 1-6-19,Kamikuratsukuri,Hirano-ku,Osaka Japan. Phone : +81 6 6793 8424 Fax: +81 6 6793 3336 e-mail: world_support@icom.co.jp URL : http:/Awww.icom.co.jp/world Date: January 11, 2011 To Whom It May Concern Subject: Confidentiality and Short-Term Confidentiality Letter Applicant: Icom Incorporated FCC ID: AFJ318300 Dear Sir/Madam:

The applicant would like to request the following documents submitted with this application for certification be withheld from public disclosure as per Section 0.457 & 0.459 of FCC Rules. Confidential

. Operational Description

. Block Diagram Schematics Parts List Tuning Info Internal Photos OAhwOn =

Short-Term Confidential 7. External Photos 8. Users Manual The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation shall not be made. Regards Takayuki Watanabe General Manager of Quality Department

 

 

January 24, 2011 Ultratech Engineering Labs, Inc. 3000 Bristol Circle Oakville, Ontario L6H 6G4 Subject:

Applicant:

Product:

Model:

FCC ID:

ICOM Incorporated HF/VHF/UHF Transceiver IC-9100 AFJ318300 Certification Testing in Accordance with FCC CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B - Scanning Receivers OUR TELEPHONE NO.:

Dear Sir/Madam:

As appointed agent for ICOM Incorporated, we submit the application for certification of the above product. Please review all files uploaded to your electronic filing site. If you have any queries, please do not hesitate to contact us by our TOLL FREE number:

Yours truly, Dan Huynh Dan Huynh Authorized Agent 1-877-747-6381 UltraTech Group of Labs FCC TCB & IC CB Ultratechs Accreditations:

0685 FCC 91038 1309 46390-2049 NvLap Lab Code 200093-0 SL2-IN-E-1119R Korea KCC-RRL CA2049 3000 Bristol Circle, Oakville, Ontario, Canada L6H 6G4 Tel.: (905) 829-1570 Fax.: (905) 829-8050 Website: www.ultratech-labs.com Email: vic@ultratech-labs.com